Ih P c2655w MFP Ta Uk Data PDF

P-C2655w MFP
Operation Guide
> Preface
Preface
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take
simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition.
Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine.
To maintain quality, we recommend using genuine own brand toner containers, which must
pass numerous quality inspections.
The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure.
We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number

The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.
You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number
before contacting your Service Representative.
i
Contents
Preface ..................................................................................................................................... i
Contents .................................................................................................................................. ii
Overview ................................................................................................................................ ix
Machine Features ................................................................................................................... x
Color and Image Quality Functions ................................................................................... xiv
Basic Color Modes ...................................................................................................... xiv
Adjusting Image Quality and Color............................................................................... xv
Guides Provided with the Machine .................................................................................... xvi
About the Operation Guide (this Guide) ......................................................................... xviii
Structure of the guide ................................................................................................. xviii
Conventions Used in This Guide................................................................................. xix
Menu Map ............................................................................................................................. xxi
1 Legal and Safety Information ................................................................... 1-1

Notice ................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide ............................................................................. 1-2
Environment .............................................................................................................. 1-3
Precautions for Use ................................................................................................... 1-4
Laser Safety (Europe) ............................................................................................... 1-5
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning .................................................................... 1-6
EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................. 1-6
EK1-ITB 2000 ............................................................................................................ 1-6
Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ........................................................................... 1-6
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................. 1-6
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ................................................................. 1-7
Legal Information ...................................................................................................... 1-8
Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................. 1-14
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function ............................................................................ 1-14
Resource Saving - Paper ........................................................................................ 1-14
Environmental benefits of "Power Management" .................................................... 1-14
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ............................................................... 1-14
2 Installing and Setting up the Machine ..................................................... 2-1

Part Names (Machine Exterior) ........................................................................................ 2-2
Part Names (Connectors/Interior) .................................................................................... 2-4
Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached) ........................................................ 2-6
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices .................................................................. 2-7
Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................ 2-8
Connecting LAN Cable .............................................................................................. 2-8
Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................. 2-9
Connecting the Power Cable .................................................................................... 2-9
Power On/Off ................................................................................................................... 2-10
Power On ................................................................................................................ 2-10
Power Off ................................................................................................................ 2-10
Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................. 2-11
Operation Panel Keys ............................................................................................. 2-11
Touch Panel ..................................................................................................................... 2-12
Home Screen .......................................................................................................... 2-12
Display for Device Information ................................................................................ 2-16
Functions key .......................................................................................................... 2-17
Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set ....................................................................... 2-18
Using the [Enter] key ............................................................................................... 2-19
Using the [Quick No. Search] key ........................................................................... 2-19
Help Screen ............................................................................................................ 2-20
Login/Logout ................................................................................................................... 2-21
Login ....................................................................................................................... 2-21
ii
Logout ..................................................................................................................... 2-22
Default Settings of the Machine ..................................................................................... 2-23
Setting Date and Time ............................................................................................ 2-23
Network Setup ................................................................................................................. 2-24
Configuring the Wired Network ............................................................................... 2-24
Configuring the Wireless Network ........................................................................... 2-26
Setting Wi-Fi Direct ................................................................................................. 2-30
Energy Saver function .................................................................................................... 2-32
Sleep ....................................................................................................................... 2-32
Auto Sleep ............................................................................................................... 2-32
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ............................................................................ 2-33
Sleep Level (Energy Saver and Quick Recovery) (models except for Europe) ...... 2-33
Power Off Rule (models for Europe) ....................................................................... 2-33
Quiet Mode ....................................................................................................................... 2-34
Quick Setup Wizard ......................................................................................................... 2-35
Installing Software .......................................................................................................... 2-37
Software on DVD (Windows) .................................................................................. 2-37
Installing Software in Windows ............................................................................... 2-38
Uninstalling the Software ........................................................................................ 2-44
Installing Software in Mac Computer ...................................................................... 2-45
Setting TWAIN Driver .............................................................................................. 2-47
Setting WIA Driver ................................................................................................... 2-49
Checking the Counter ..................................................................................................... 2-50
Additional Preparations for the Administrator ............................................................. 2-51
Sending Documents to a PC ................................................................................... 2-51
Strengthening the Security ...................................................................................... 2-51
Embedded Web Server RX ............................................................................................. 2-52
Accessing Embedded Web Server RX ................................................................... 2-53
Changing Security Settings ..................................................................................... 2-54
Changing Device Information .................................................................................. 2-56
E-mail Settings ........................................................................................................ 2-58
Registering Destinations ......................................................................................... 2-62
Transferring Data from Our Other Products ................................................................. 2-63
Migrating the Address Book .................................................................................... 2-63
3 Preparation before Use ............................................................................. 3-1

Loading Paper ................................................................................................................... 3-2
Precaution for Loading Paper ................................................................................... 3-2
Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................. 3-3
Loading in the Cassette 1 ......................................................................................... 3-4
Loading in the Cassette 2 ......................................................................................... 3-7
Precautions for Outputting Paper .................................................................................... 3-9
Paper Stopper ........................................................................................................... 3-9
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC .............................. 3-10
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name ............................... 3-10
Making a note of the user name and domain name ................................................ 3-11
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ................................ 3-12
Configuring Windows Firewall ................................................................................. 3-15
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ............................................................ 3-20
Adding a Destination (Address Book) ..................................................................... 3-20
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) .................................... 3-26
4 Printing from PC ........................................................................................ 4-1

Printer Driver Properties Screen ...................................................................................... 4-2
Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................. 4-3
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) .................................... 4-3
Printing from PC ................................................................................................................ 4-4
Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................. 4-4
iii
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper ...................................................................... 4-6
Canceling Printing from a Computer ......................................................................... 4-9
Printing from the Handheld Device ............................................................................... 4-10
Printing by AirPrint .................................................................................................. 4-10
Printing by Google Cloud Print ................................................................................ 4-10
Printing by Mopria ................................................................................................... 4-10
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ......................................................................................... 4-10
Printing Data Saved in the Printer ................................................................................. 4-11
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job ............................... 4-11
Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................. 4-12
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ......................................... 4-12
Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................. 4-13
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ........................................... 4-13
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box ................................................................ 4-14
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box .......................................... 4-14
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box .......................................................... 4-15
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box .................................... 4-15
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ............................................................ 4-16
Accessing the Status Monitor .................................................................................. 4-16
Exiting the Status Monitor ....................................................................................... 4-16
Quick View State ..................................................................................................... 4-16
Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................. 4-17
Paper Tray Status Tab ............................................................................................ 4-17
Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................... 4-17
Alert Tab .................................................................................................................. 4-18
Status Monitor Context Menu .................................................................................. 4-18
Status Monitor Notification Settings ........................................................................ 4-19
5 Operation on the Machine ........................................................................ 5-1

Loading Originals .............................................................................................................. 5-2
Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................. 5-2
Loading Originals in the Document Processor .......................................................... 5-3
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ......................................................................... 5-5
Favorites ............................................................................................................................ 5-8
Registering Favorite Using the Wizard Mode ............................................................ 5-9
Registering Favorite Using the Program Mode ....................................................... 5-10
Recalling Favorite using the Wizard Mode .............................................................. 5-11
Recalling Favorite using the Program Mode ........................................................... 5-12
Editing Favorite ....................................................................................................... 5-12
Deleting Favorite ..................................................................................................... 5-12
Registering Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-13
Adding Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-13
Editing Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-14
Deleting Shortcuts ................................................................................................... 5-14
Copying ............................................................................................................................ 5-15
Basic Operation ....................................................................................................... 5-15
Canceling Jobs ........................................................................................................ 5-16
Frequently-Used Sending Method ................................................................................. 5-17
Sending Document via E-mail ........................................................................................ 5-18
Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-18
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail .................................................................. 5-18
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) ............. 5-20
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer ................................ 5-20
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) ................................... 5-23
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server ..................................................... 5-23
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ...................................................................................... 5-25
iv
Scanning Document Using Application ................................................................... 5-25
Useful Sending Method .................................................................................................. 5-26
WSD Scan ........................................................................................................................ 5-27
Installing Driver Software ........................................................................................ 5-27
WSD scan ............................................................................................................... 5-28
Scanning with File Management Utility ......................................................................... 5-29
Recalling a Favorite Configured in FMU ................................................................. 5-29
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ....................................... 5-30
Send to Me (E-mail) ......................................................................................................... 5-31
Sending a document to the mail address of the logged in user .............................. 5-31
Canceling Sending Jobs ................................................................................................. 5-32
Handling Destination ...................................................................................................... 5-33
Specifying Destination ............................................................................................. 5-33
Choosing from the Address Book ........................................................................... 5-34
Choosing from the External Address Book ............................................................. 5-36
Choosing from the One Touch Key ......................................................................... 5-37
Checking and Editing Destinations ......................................................................... 5-37
Confirmation Screen of Destinations ....................................................................... 5-38
Recall ...................................................................................................................... 5-38
How to use the FAX Function ........................................................................................ 5-39
Using Document Boxes .................................................................................................. 5-40
What is Job Box? .................................................................................................... 5-40
What is Removable Memory Box? .......................................................................... 5-40
Sub Address Box/Polling Box ................................................................................. 5-40
Operating using Removable USB Memory ................................................................... 5-41
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ........................................ 5-41
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ................................................ 5-43
Check the USB Memory Information ....................................................................... 5-44
Removing USB Memory .......................................................................................... 5-44
6 Using Various Functions .......................................................................... 6-1

Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................................... 6-2
About Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................... 6-2
Copy .......................................................................................................................... 6-2
Send .......................................................................................................................... 6-4
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) .............................................. 6-6
Functions ........................................................................................................................... 6-8
Paper Selection ......................................................................................................... 6-9
Zoom ....................................................................................................................... 6-10
Density .................................................................................................................... 6-11
Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-12
Combine .................................................................................................................. 6-14
Color Selection ........................................................................................................ 6-16
Collate ..................................................................................................................... 6-16
Original Size ............................................................................................................ 6-17
Original Orientation ................................................................................................. 6-18
Mixed Size Originals ............................................................................................... 6-19
Original Image ......................................................................................................... 6-19
EcoPrint ................................................................................................................... 6-20
Hue Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 6-20
Color Balance .......................................................................................................... 6-21
Sharpness ............................................................................................................... 6-22
Contrast ................................................................................................................... 6-22
Background Density Adj. (Background Density Adjustment) .................................. 6-23
Skip Blank Page ...................................................................................................... 6-23
Saturation ................................................................................................................ 6-24
Continuous Scan ..................................................................................................... 6-24
v
Job Finish Notice ..................................................................................................... 6-25
File Name Entry ...................................................................................................... 6-26
Priority Override ...................................................................................................... 6-26
File Format .............................................................................................................. 6-27
Duplex (2-sided Original) ........................................................................................ 6-30
Sending Size ........................................................................................................... 6-31
File Separation ........................................................................................................ 6-31
Scan Resolution ...................................................................................................... 6-32
E-mail Subject/Body ................................................................................................ 6-32
FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................... 6-33
Storing Size ............................................................................................................. 6-33
Encrypted PDF Password ....................................................................................... 6-34
JPEG/TIFF Print ...................................................................................................... 6-34
XPS Fit to Page ....................................................................................................... 6-34
7 Status/Job Cancel ..................................................................................... 7-1

Checking Job Status ......................................................................................................... 7-2
Details of the Status Screens .................................................................................... 7-3
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs ..................................................................... 7-7
Checking Job History ....................................................................................................... 7-8
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ......................................................... 7-9
Sending the Log History ............................................................................................ 7-9
Job Operation .................................................................................................................. 7-10
Pause and Resumption of Jobs .............................................................................. 7-10
Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-10
Device/Communication ................................................................................................... 7-11
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ................... 7-13
8 Setup and Registration (System Menu) .................................................. 8-1

System Menu ..................................................................................................................... 8-2
Operation Method ..................................................................................................... 8-2
System Menu Settings .............................................................................................. 8-3
Language .................................................................................................................. 8-5
Report ....................................................................................................................... 8-5
User Property ............................................................................................................ 8-7
Cassette/MP Tray Settings ....................................................................................... 8-8
Common Settings .................................................................................................... 8-10
Home ....................................................................................................................... 8-19
Copy ........................................................................................................................ 8-20
Send ........................................................................................................................ 8-21
Document Box ......................................................................................................... 8-22
FAX ......................................................................................................................... 8-22
Address Book/One Touch ....................................................................................... 8-22
User Login/Job Accounting ..................................................................................... 8-23
Printer ...................................................................................................................... 8-24
System/Network ...................................................................................................... 8-26
Date/Timer/Energy Saver ........................................................................................ 8-38
Adjustment/Maintenance ......................................................................................... 8-41
9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) ... 9-1
Overview of User Login Administration .......................................................................... 9-2
Managing the Job Account from PC ......................................................................... 9-2
Enabling User Login Administration ............................................................................... 9-3
Setting User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-4
Authentication Security ............................................................................................. 9-4
Adding a User (Local User List) ................................................................................ 9-5
Changing User Properties ......................................................................................... 9-8
vi
User Login Administration for Printing ..................................................................... 9-11
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN ............................................................ 9-12
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA ................................................................. 9-13
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC .................................................... 9-14
Group Authorization Settings .................................................................................. 9-15
Guest Authorization Set. ......................................................................................... 9-18
Obtain NW User Property ....................................................................................... 9-21
Simple Login Settings ............................................................................................. 9-23
ID Card Settings ...................................................................................................... 9-25
PIN Login Settings .................................................................................................. 9-26
Using User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-27
Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-27
Overview of Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-28
To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ..................... 9-28
Enabling Job Accounting ............................................................................................... 9-29
Job Accounting Access ........................................................................................... 9-29
Setting an Account .......................................................................................................... 9-30
Adding an Account .................................................................................................. 9-30
Restricting the Use of the Machine ......................................................................... 9-31
Editing an Account .................................................................................................. 9-32
Deleting an Account ................................................................................................ 9-33
Job Accounting for Printing ..................................................................................... 9-34
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN .................................................................. 9-35
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ....................................................................... 9-36
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer .................................... 9-37
Configuring Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-38
Default Setting ......................................................................................................... 9-38
Counting the Number of Pages Printed .................................................................. 9-39
Print Accounting Report .......................................................................................... 9-40
Using Job Accounting .................................................................................................... 9-41
Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-41
Unknown User Settings .................................................................................................. 9-42
Unknown ID Job ...................................................................................................... 9-42
Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown ....................................... 9-43
10 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 10-1

Regular Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 10-2
Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 10-2
Cleaning Glass Platen ............................................................................................. 10-2
Cleaning Slit Grass ................................................................................................. 10-3
Cleaning Paper Transfer Unit .................................................................................. 10-4
Toner Container Replacement ................................................................................ 10-5
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................... 10-8
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 10-9
Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................... 10-9
Machine Operation Trouble ..................................................................................... 10-9
Printed Image Trouble ........................................................................................... 10-12
Color printing trouble ............................................................................................. 10-15
Responding to Messages ...................................................................................... 10-16
Adjustment/Maintenance .............................................................................................. 10-29
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................... 10-29
Color Registration Procedure ................................................................................ 10-29
Drum Refresh ........................................................................................................ 10-34
Calibration ............................................................................................................. 10-34
Laser Scanner Cleaning ........................................................................................ 10-34
Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................... 10-35
Jam Location Indicators ........................................................................................ 10-35
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 ............................................................ 10-36
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2 ............................................................ 10-37
vii
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray .......................................... 10-39
Remove any jammed paper in Rear Cover 1 ........................................................ 10-42
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor ...................................... 10-45
11 Appendix .................................................................................................. 11-1

Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................ 11-2
Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................. 11-2
Optional Applications .............................................................................................. 11-6
Starting Application Use .......................................................................................... 11-6
Checking Details of Application ............................................................................... 11-7
Character Entry Method .................................................................................................. 11-8
Entry Screens .......................................................................................................... 11-8
Entering Characters .............................................................................................. 11-10
Paper .............................................................................................................................. 11-11
Basic Paper Specifications .................................................................................... 11-11
Choosing the Appropriate Paper ........................................................................... 11-12
Special Paper ........................................................................................................ 11-15
Specifications ................................................................................................................ 11-19
Machine ................................................................................................................. 11-19
Copy Functions ..................................................................................................... 11-21
Printer Functions ................................................................................................... 11-21
Scanner Functions ................................................................................................ 11-22
Document Processor ............................................................................................. 11-22
Paper Feeder ........................................................................................................ 11-23
Glossary ......................................................................................................................... 11-24
Index ............................................................................................................................ Index-1
viii
> Overview
Overview
Input Data Security
You can apply the various machine
Original Electronic data USB memory Fax data security levels to your specific needs.
Strengthen security
(page xii)
Operations from your PC
Document
Box functions
Embedded Web Server RX
You can check the status and change This function serves a variety of purposes,
the settings of the machine from a Web including saving data in the machine and on a USB
browser on your computer. memory stick.
Embedded Web Server RX (page
2-52) Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-11)
Embedded Web Server RX User
Guide
Output Data
Copy functions Printer functions Send functions USB memory Fax functions
Copying (page 5-15) Frequently-Used Sending Saving Documents to FAX Operation

Printing from PC (page 4-1) Method (page 5-17) USB Memory (Scan to Guide
USB) (page 5-43)
NOTE
• Before using the machine, be sure to read the following:
Legal and Safety Information (page 1-1)
• To prepare the device for use, including setting up cable connections and installing software.
Installing and Setting up the Machine (page 2-1)
• To learn how to load paper, set up shared folders, and add addresses to the address book, refer to the following:
Preparation before Use (page 3-1)
ix
> Machine Features
Machine Features
The machine is equipped with many useful functions.
Using Various Functions (page 6-1)
Here are some examples.
Optimize your office workflow

Access to frequently used functions Set up the machine easily Set up fax easily (FAX Setup)
with just one touch (Favorites) (Quick Setup Wizard)
1 2 3
1 2 3
You can preset frequently used functions. You can configure the necessary settings You can configure the necessary settings
Once you register frequently used before using the machine in the wizard before using fax in the wizard mode.
settings as favorite, you can call up the mode.
FAX Setup (page 2-35)
settings easily. Using this favorite brings Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-35)
the same results even if operated by
another person.
Favorites (page 5-8)
Optimize your office workflow

Scan originals of different sizes at a Scan a large number of originals in Send one time with multiple sending
time (Mixed Size Originals) separate batches and produce as one options (Multi Sending)
job (Continuous Scan)
1 11 21 1
Folio A4 Folio
A4
(Legal) (Letter) (Letter)
(Legal)
1~10 11~20 21~30 1~30
It is useful when preparing conference It is useful when preparing many-page You can send a same document to the
materials. handouts. multiple destinations using a different
You can set the different sized originals at When a large number of originals cannot method.
one time so you don't need to reset the be placed in the document processor at You can specify multiple destinations of
originals regardless of size. one time, the originals can be scanned in different send methods such as E-mail,
separate batches and then copied or sent SMB, and Fax.
Mixed Size Originals (page 6-19)
as one job. You can reduce your workflow by sending
Continuous Scan (page 6-24) a job at once.
Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-
30)
x
> Machine Features
Optimize your office workflow Save energy and cost

Send a FAX from a PC Save energy as needed Use less toner for printing (EcoPrint)
(Sending FAX from PC) (Energy Saver function)
Off
You can save the paper used for sending The machine is equipped with Energy You can save toner consumption with this
a FAX with this function. Saver function that automatically function.
You can send a file to be faxed from the switched into Sleep Mode. You can set When you only need to check the printed
PC without printing the file, so that you appropriate Energy Saver Recovery content, such as a trial print run or
can reduce the number of pieces of paper Level depending on the operation. documents for internal confirmation, use
and perform sending jobs efficiently. Energy Saver function (page 2-32) this function to save toner.
FAX Operation Guide Use this function when a high-quality print
is not required.
EcoPrint (page 6-20)
Save energy and cost

Reduce paper use Skip blank pages when printing Send a FAX to reduce the
(Paper Saving Printing) (Skip Blank Page) communication cost
(FAX Delayed Transmission)
You can print originals on both sides of When there are blank pages in a scanned You can reduce the communication cost
the paper. You can also print multiple document, this function skips the blank with this function.
originals onto one sheet. pages and prints only pages that are not The communication cost can be reduced
Favorites (page 5-8) blank. by setting the timer to the time period
Skip Blank Page (page 6-23) during which the communication cost is
low.
FAX Operation Guide
xi
> Machine Features
Strengthen security
Password-protect a PDF file Prevent loss of finished documents Log in by ID card
(PDF Encryption Functions) (Private Print) (Card Authentication)
OK !
Use the PDF format's password security Temporarily saving print jobs in the main You can log in simply by touching an ID
options to restrict document viewing, unit document box and outputting them card. You don't need to enter your user
printing and editing. when in front of the device can prevent name and password.
Encrypted PDF Password (page 6- documents from being taken by others. Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card
34) Printing Data Saved in the Printer Authentication Kit" (page 11-4)
(page 4-11)
Strengthen security Use functions more efficiently

Strengthen security Make the machine quiet (Quiet Mode) Install the machine without concerning
(Settings for Administrator) the network cables (Wireless Network)
Various functions are available for You can make the machine quiet by If there is a wireless LAN environment, it
administrators to strengthen security. reducing its running noise. ON/OFF is possible to install the unit without
switching by one-touch is possible. worrying about the network wiring. In
Strengthening the Security (page 2-
addition, Wi-Fi Direct, etc. are supported.
51) Quiet Mode (page 2-34)
Configuring the Wireless Network
(page 2-26)
Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-30)
xii
> Machine Features
Use functions more efficiently

Use USB memory (USB Memory) Specify image file format Perform remote operation
(File Format) (Embedded Web Server RX)
It is useful when you need to print You can select the various file formats You can access to the machine remotely
documents outside your office or you when sending/storing images. to print, send or download data.
cannot print documents from your PC. File Format (page 6-27) Administrators can configure the machine
You can print the document from the USB behavior or management settings.
memory by plugging it directly into the Embedded Web Server RX (page 2-
machine. 52)
Original scanned at the machine can be
saved in the USB memory also.
Printing Documents Stored in
Removable USB Memory (page 5-
41)
Saving Documents to USB Memory
(Scan to USB) (page 5-43)
xiii
> Color and Image Quality Functions
Color and Image Quality Functions

The machine is equipped with various color and image quality functions. You can adjust the scanned image as desired.
Basic Color Modes

The basic color modes are as follows.
Reference image Reference

Color mode Description
Before After page
Full Color Scans a document in full color. page 6-16
Grayscale Scans a document in grayscale. page 6-16
Black & White Scans a document in black & white. page 6-16
For details, refer to the following:

Color Selection (page 6-16)
xiv
> Color and Image Quality Functions
Adjusting Image Quality and Color

To adjust the image quality or color of an image, use the following functions.
Sample image
I want to... Function Page
Before After
Adjust the color precisely.
Adjust the density. Density page 6-11
Adjust the color by strengthening Color Balance page 6-21

blue or red tones.
Example: Strengthening red
Change the image by individually Hue adjustment page 6-20

adjusting each of the six colors:
red, blue, green, cyan, magenta,
and yellow.
Example: Changing red tones
close to yellow to yellow, and
cyan tones close to blue to blue
Adjust the saturation. Saturation page 6-24
Adjust the image quality precisely
Emphasize or blur the image Sharpness page 6-22

outline.
Example: Emphasize the image
outlines
Adjust the difference between Contrast page 6-22

dark and light parts of the image.
Darken or lighten the background Background Density page 6-23

(the area with no texts or images)
of a document.
Example: Lightening the
background
Adjust the scanned image
Decrease the file size and File format page 6-27

produce the characters clearly. [High Comp. PDF]
xv
> Guides Provided with the Machine
Guides Provided with the Machine

The following guides are provided with the machine. Refer to each guide as needed.
The contents of the guides are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine
performance.
Printed guides
Quick Guide
Start using the
machine quickly Explains how to use basic functions of the machine, how to use convenient features, how
to perform routine maintenance, and what to do when problems occur.
Safety Guide
Provides safety and cautionary information for installation environment and use of the
For safe use of the machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
machine Safety Guide (P-C2655w MFP)
Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the cautionary labels
and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
xvi
> Guides Provided with the Machine
Guides (PDF) on the DVD (Product Library)

Operation Guide (This Guide)
Use the machine
thoughtfully Explains how to load paper and perform copy, print and scan operations, and indicates
default settings and other information.
FAX Operation Guide

Use the fax functions
Explains how to use the fax function.
Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide

Use the ID card
Explains how to perform authentication using the ID card.
Easily register Embedded Web Server RX User Guide

machine information Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to check and
and configure settings change settings.
Print data from a Printing System Driver User Guide

computer Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.
Network Tool for Direct Printing Operation Guide

Directly print a PDF file
Explains how to print PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader.
Monitor the machine NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide

and printers on the Explains how to monitor your network printing system (the machine) with NETWORK
network PRINT MONITOR.
File Management Utility User Guide

Scan images and save
with information Explains how to use File Management Utility to set various parameters and send and save
scanned documents.
PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference

Print without using the Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).
printer driver PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference
Describes the PRESCRIBE command functions and control for each type of emulation.
Maintenance Menu User Guide

Adjust the print or
scan position Maintenance Menu provides the explanation on how to configure the print, scan, and other
settings.
Install the following versions of Adobe Reader to view the manuals on the DVD.
Version 8.0 or later
xvii
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Structure of the guide
The Operation Guide contains the following chapters.
Chapter Contents
1 Legal and Safety Information Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.
2 Installing and Setting up the Explains part names, cable connections, installation of the software, login, logout, and
Machine other matters related to administration of the machine.
3 Preparation before Use Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the machine, such
as how to load paper, and create an address book.
4 Printing from PC Explains functions that are available when the machine is used as a printer.
5 Operation on the Machine Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as placing originals, making
copies, sending documents, and using document boxes.
6 Using Various Functions Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.
7 Status/Job Cancel Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel jobs
being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and toner levels, how
to check the device status, and how to cancel fax transmission.
8 Setup and Registration (System Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.
Menu)
9 User Authentication and Explains user login and job accounting.

Accounting (User Login, Job
Accounting)
10 Troubleshooting Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam or other
problem occurs.
11 Appendix Describes convenient options that are available for the machine. Provides information
on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of terms. Explains how to enter
characters, and lists the specifications of the machine.
xviii
Conventions Used in This Guide

Adobe Reader XI is used as an example in the explanations below.
Click an item in the Table of Click to move from the current page to the previously
Contents to jump to the displayed page. This is convenient when you want to return
corresponding page. to the page from which you jumped to the current page.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational requirements
and restrictions to operate the
machine correctly, and avoid
damage to the machine or property.
NOTE
Indicates supplemental
explanations and reference
information for operations.
Refer to
Click the underlined text to jump to
the corresponding page.
CAUTION
Indicates that personal injury or
mechanical damage may result
from insufficient attention to or
incorrect compliance with the
related points.
NOTE
The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do not
appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.
Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.
Convention Description
[Bold] Indicates keys and buttons.
"Regular" Indicates a message or setting.
xix
Conventions used in procedures for operating the machine

In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:
Actual procedure Procedure indicated in this guide

Select the [System Menu] key. [System Menu] key > [Common Settings] > [Sound]

Select [ ].

Select [Common Settings].

Select [Sound].
Size and Orientation of Paper

Paper sizes such as A5 and Statement can be used in both the horizontal and vertical orientations. To distinguish the
orientations when these sizes are used, "R" is added to sizes used in the vertical orientation. In addition, the following
icons are used to indicate paper placement orientations on the touch panel.
Orientation Setting Position Icons on the touch Indicated size in this

(X=Length, Y=Width) panel Guide*1
Vertical Cassette A5-R, Statement-R

orientation (-R)
Multi purpose A5-R, Statement-R

tray
Horizontal Cassette A5
orientation
Multi purpose A5, Statement

tray
*1 Paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and source tray. For details, refer to the following.
Specifications (page 11-19)
xx
> Menu Map
Menu Map
This is a list of menus displayed on the touch panel. Depending on the settings, some menus may not be displayed.
Some menu names may differ from their reference titles.
Copy
Paper Selection (page 6-9)
Zoom (page 6-10)
Density (page 6-11)
Duplex (page 6-12)
Combine (page 6-14)
Functions Collate (page 6-16)
Original Size (page 6-17)
Original Orientation (page 6-18)
Original Image (page 6-19)
Hue Adjustment (page 6-20)
Color Balance (page 6-21)
Sharpness (page 6-22)
Contrast (page 6-22)
Background Density Adj. (page 6-23)
Skip Blank Page (page 6-23)
Saturation (page 6-24)
Continuous Scan (page 6-24)
Job Finish Notice (page 6-25)
File Name Entry (page 6-26)
Priority Override (page 6-26)
xxi
> Menu Map
Send
One Touch Key (page 5-37)
Address Book (page 5-34)
Ext Address Book (Refer to Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.)
E-mail (page 5-18)
Folder (page 5-20)(page 5-23)
FAX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
WSD Scan (page 5-28)
Functions Color Selection (page 6-16)
File Format (page 6-27)
Original Size (page 6-17)
Duplex (page 6-30)
Sending Size (page 6-31)
File Separation (page 6-31)
Scan Resolution (page 6-32)
Density (page 6-11)
FAX TX Resolution (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Zoom (page 6-10)
E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-32)
FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-33)
FAX Delayed Transmission (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
FAX Direct Transmission (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
FAX Polling RX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
FAX TX Report (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
xxii
> Menu Map
Job Box
Job Box Private Print/Stored Job (page 4-12)
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold (page 4-14)
xxiii
> Menu Map
Removable
Memory
Removable Memory Print Paper Selection (page 6-9)
Collate (page 6-16)
Duplex (page 6-12)
Functions EcoPrint (page 6-20)
Priority Override (page 6-26)
Encrypted PDF Password (page 6-34)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 6-34)
XPS Fit to Page (page 6-34)
Menu Store File File Format (page 6-27)
Duplex (page 6-30)
Density (page 6-11)
Functions Original Size (page 6-17)
Storing Size (page 6-33)
Zoom (page 6-10)
xxiv
> Menu Map
Sub Address Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Polling Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
or
Print Job Status (page 7-8)
Send Job Status (page 7-4)
Store Job Status (page 7-5)
Scheduled Job (page 7-6)
Print Job Log (page 7-8)
Send Job Log (page 7-8)
Store Job Log (page 7-8)
FAX Job Log (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Scanner (page 7-11)
Printer (page 7-11)
FAX (refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Toner Status (page 7-13)
Paper Status (page 7-13)
Removable Memory (page 7-11)
USB Keyboard (page 7-11)
Network Connection Status (page 7-11)
Wi-Fi Direct (page 7-12)
Wi-Fi (page 7-12)
xxv
> Menu Map
or
System
Menu
Quick Setup Wizard FAX Setup (page 2-35)
Paper Setup (page 2-35)
Energy Saver Setup (page 2-35)
Network Setup (page 2-35)
Language (page 8-5)
Report Report Print Status Page (page 8-5)
Font List (page 8-5)
Network Status (page 8-5)
Service Status (page 8-5)
Accounting Report (page 8-6)
Sub Address Box List (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
FAX List (Index) (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
FAX List (No.) (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Outgoing FAX Report (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Incoming FAX Report (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Admin Report Outgoing FAX Report (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Settings
Incoming FAX Report (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Result Report Send Result Report (page 8-6)

Setting
RX Result Report (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Job Finish Notice Setting (page 8-6)
Send Log History Sending Log History (page 8-7)
Auto Sending (page 8-7)
Destination (page 8-7)
Job Log Subject (page 8-7)
Personal Information (page 8-7)
Counter Printed Pages (page 2-50)
Scanned Pages (page 2-50)
User Property (page 9-8)
Cassette/MP Tray Cassette 1 (page 8-8)

Settings
Cassette 2 (page 8-8)
Multipurpose Tray (page 8-9)
xxvi
> Menu Map
Common Settings Default Screen (page 8-10)
Sound Buzzer (page 8-10)
FAX Speaker Volume (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
FAX Monitor Volume (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Original Settings Custom Original Size (page 8-11)
Auto Detect Original Size (DP) (page 8-11)
Default Original Size (page 8-12)
Default Original Size (Platen) (page 8-12)
Paper Settings Custom Paper Size (page 8-13)
Media Type Settings (page 8-15)
Default Paper Source (page 8-14)
Media for Auto (Color) (page 8-14)
Media for Auto (B & W) (page 8-14)
Special Paper Action (page 8-14)
Show Paper Setup Message (page 8-14)
Function Defaults File Format (page 8-16)
Collate (page 8-16)
Color Selection (Copy) (page 8-16)
Color Select. (Send/Store) (page 8-16)
Original Image (Copy) (page 8-16)
Original Image (Send/Store) (page 8-16)
Background Density Adj. (Copy) (page 8-16)
Background Density Adj. (Send/Store) (page 8-16)
Skip Blank Page (Copy) (page 8-16)
Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) (page 8-16)
FAX TX Resolution (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Zoom (page 8-16)
xxvii
> Menu Map
Common Settings Function Defaults Continuous Scan (Copy) (page 8-16)
Continuous Scan (FAX) (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Continuous Scan (Send/Store) (page 8-16)
E-mail Subject/Body (page 8-17)
FTP Encrypted TX (page 8-17)
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 8-17)
XPS Fit to Page (page 8-17)
Detail Settings Image Quality (page 8-17)
PDF/A (page 8-17)
High Comp. PDF (page 8-17)
Blank Detection Level (Copy) (page 8-17)
Blank Detection Level (Send/Store) (page 8-17)
Preset Limit (page 8-17)
Error Handling Duplexing Error (page 8-18)
Paper Mismatch Error (page 8-18)
Color Toner Empty Action (page 8-18)
Measurement (page 8-18)
Low Toner Alert (page 8-18)
Keyboard Layout (page 8-19)
USB Keyboard Type (page 8-19)
Format SD Card (page 8-19)
Display Status/Log (page 8-19)
Show Power Off Message (page 8-19)
Home Customize Desktop (page 2-13)
Customize Task Screen (page 2-13)
Wallpaper (page 2-13)
Copy Auto Paper Selection (page 8-20)
Auto % Priority (page 8-20)
DP Read Action (page 8-20)
Platen Scan Action (page 8-20)
Send Dest. Check before Send (page 8-21)
Entry Check for New Dest. (page 8-21)
Send and Forward (page 8-21)
Color TIFF Compression (page 8-21)
Default Screen (page 8-21)
New Destination Entry (page 8-21)
Recall Destination (page 8-21)
xxviii
> Menu Map
Document Box Sub Address Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Job Box Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-22)
Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-22)
Polling Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
FAX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Address Book/One Address Book (page 3-20)

Touch
One Touch Key (page 3-26)
Address Book Sort (page 8-23)

Defaults
Address Book (page 8-23)
Print List (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
User Login/Job User Login Settings User Login (page 9-3)

Accounting
Local User List (page 9-5)
ID Card Settings Keyboard Login (page 9-25)
Additional Authentication (page 9-25)
PIN Login(page 9-26)
Simple login Simple Login (page 9-23)

settings
Simple Login Setup (page 9-23)
User Account Lockout (page 9-4)

Lockout Settings
Lockout Policy (page 9-4)
Locked out Users List (page 9-4)
Group Authorization Group Authorization (page 9-15)

Set.
Group List (page 9-16)
Guest Authorization Guest Authorization (page 9-18)

Set.
Guest Property (page 9-19)
Obtain NW User Property (page 9-21)
xxix
> Menu Map
User Login/Job Job Accounting Job Accounting (page 9-29)

Accounting Settings
Job Accounting Access (page 9-29)
Print Accounting Report (page 9-40)
Total Job Accounting (page 9-39)
Each Job Accounting (page 9-39)
Accounting List (page 9-30)
Default Setting Apply Limit (page 9-38)
Copy/Printer Count (page 9-38)
Default Counter Limit (page 9-38)
Unknown User Unknown ID Job (page 9-42)

Settings
User Property (page 9-43)
Printer Emulation (page 8-24)
Color Setting (page 8-24)
Override A4/Letter (page 8-24)
Duplex (page 8-24)
Copies (page 8-24)
Orientation (page 8-24)
Wide A4 (page 8-24)
Form Feed TimeOut (page 8-24)
LF Action (page 8-24)
CR Action (page 8-25)
Job Name (page 8-25)
User Name (page 8-25)
MP Tray Priority (page 8-25)
Paper Feed Mode (page 8-25)
Auto cassette Change (page 8-25)
Resolution (page 8-25)
Gloss Mode (page 8-25)
xxx
> Menu Map
System/Network Network Host Name (page 8-26)
Wi-Fi Direct Settings Wi-Fi Direct (page 8-26)
Device Name (page 8-26)
IP Address (page 8-26)
Auto Disconnect (page 8-26)
Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi (page 8-26)
Setup (page 8-27)
TCP/IP Settings (page 8-28)
Restart Network (page 8-29)
Wired Network TCP/IP Settings (page 8-29)

Settings
LAN Interface (page 8-29)
Bonjour Protocol Setting (page 8-30)
Available Network (Wi-Fi Direct) (page 8-30)
Available Network (Wi-Fi) (page 8-30)
Available Network (Wired Network) (page 8-30)
IPSec (page 8-30)
Protocol Settings (page 8-30)
Security Settings SSL (page 8-35)
IPP Security (page 8-35)
HTTP Security (page 8-35)
SMTP Security (page 8-35)
POP3 Security (User 1) (page 8-35)
Ping (page 8-35)
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-36)
Interface Block USB Host (page 8-36)

Setting
USB Device (page 8-36)
USB Storage (page 8-36)
Security Level (page 8-36)
Restart (page 8-37)
RAM Disk Setting (page 8-37)
Optional Memory (page 8-37)
Optional Function (page 8-37)
xxxi
> Menu Map
Date/Timer/Energy Date/Time (page 8-38)

Saver
Date Format (page 8-38)
Time Zone (page 8-38)
Auto Panel Reset (page 8-38)
Panel Reset Timer (page 8-38)
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-39)
Sleep Level (models except for Europe) (page 8-39)
Sleep Timer (page 8-39)
EnergySaver RecoveryLevel (page 8-39)
Power Off Rule (models for Europe) (page 8-40
Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 8-40)
Auto Error Clear (page 8-40)
Error Clear Timer (page 8-40)
Unusable Time (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)
Ping Timeout (page 8-40)
Adjustment/ Density Adjustment Copy (page 8-41)

Maintenance
Send/Box (page 8-41)
Contrast Copy (page 8-41)
Send/Box (page 8-41)
Correcting Black Line (page 8-41)
Display Brightness (page 8-41)
Color Registration (page 8-41)
Drum Refresh (page 8-41)
Calibration (page 8-41)
Laser Scanner Cleaning (page 8-41)
Service Setting (page 8-41)
xxxii
1 Legal and Safety
Information
Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics.
Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Safety Conventions in This Guide ........................................................................................................... 1-2
Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Precautions for Use ................................................................................................................................. 1-4
Laser Safety (Europe) .............................................................................................................................. 1-5
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ................................................................................................... 1-6
EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................................................ 1-6
EK1-ITB 2000 .......................................................................................................................................... 1-6
Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ......................................................................................................... 1-6
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................................................ 1-6
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ............................................................................................... 1-7
Legal Information ..................................................................................................................................... 1-8
Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................................................ 1-14
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function .......................................................................................................... 1-14
Resource Saving - Paper ....................................................................................................................... 1-14
Environmental benefits of "Power Management" ................................................................................... 1-14
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .............................................................................................. 1-14
1-1
Legal and Safety Information > Notice
Notice
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,
other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their
meanings are indicated below.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient
attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from
insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated
inside the symbol.
... [General warning]
... [Warning of high temperature]
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited
action are indicated inside the symbol.
... [Warning of prohibited action]
... [Disassembly prohibited]
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of
the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
... [Alert of required action]
... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]
... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are
illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
NOTE
An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this
machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
1-2
Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
Temperature 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5°C)
Humidity 10 to 80%
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
• Avoid locations with vibrations.
• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the
machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of
prints, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that
the room be properly ventilated.
1-3
Precautions for Use

Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children.
If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes
and skin.
• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If
coughing develops, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of
your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,
contact a physician.
• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be
recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.
Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40°C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and
humidity.
If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multipurpose
(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
1-4
Laser Safety (Europe)

Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is
hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no
radiation can leak from the machine.
This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.
Regarding CLASS 1 laser products, information is provided on the rating label.
1-5
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning

It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do
not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.
• Paper money
• Bank note
• Securities
• Stamp
• Passport
• Certificate
Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
EN ISO 7779
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder
weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.
EK1-ITB 2000
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um
störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld
platziert werden.
Wireless Connection (Mexico only)

The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe
aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN

(If equipped)
Wireless LAN allows information to be exchanged between wireless access points instead of using a network cable,
which offers the advantage that a LAN connection can be established freely within an area in which radio waves can be
transmitted.
On the other hand, the following problems may occur if security settings are not configured, because radio waves can
pass through obstacles (including walls) and reach everywhere within a certain area.
Secretly Viewing Communication Contents

A third person with malicious objectives may intentionally monitor radio waves and gain unauthorized access to the
following communication contents.
• Personal information including ID, passwords, and credit card numbers
• Contents of email messages
1-6
Illegal Intrusion
A third party with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to personal or company networks and conduct the
following illegal actions.
• Extracting personal and confidential information (information leak)
• Entering into communication while impersonating a specific person and distributing unauthorized information
(spoofing)
• Modifying and retransmitting intercepted communications (falsification)
• Transmitting computer viruses and destroying data and systems (destruction)
Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points contain built-in security mechanisms to address these problems and to
reduce the possibility of these problems occurring by configuring the security settings of wireless LAN products when
the product is used.
We recommend that customers take responsibility and use their judgment when configuring the security settings and
that they ensure that they fully understand the problems that can occur when the product is used without configuring the
security settings.
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)

• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect medical equipment. When using this product in a medical
institution or in the vicinity of medical instruments, either use this product according to the instructions and
precautions provided by the administrator of the institution or those provided on the medical instruments.
• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect automatic control equipment including automatic doors and fire
alarms. When using this product in the vicinity of the automatic control equipment, use this product according to the
instructions and precautions provided on the automatic control equipment.
• If this product is used in devices that are directly related to service including airplanes, trains, ships, and automobiles
or this product is used in applications requiring high reliability and safety to function and in devices requiring accuracy
including those used in disaster prevention and crime prevention and those used for various safety purposes, please
use this product after considering the safety design of the entire system including adoption of a failsafe design and
redundancy design for reliability and safety maintenance of the entire system. This product is not intended for use in
applications requiring high reliability and safety including aerospace instruments, trunk communication equipment,
nuclear power control equipment, and medical equipment; hence, the decision as to whether to use this product in
these applications needs to be fully considered and determined.
1-7
Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Copyright owner is
prohibited.
Regarding Trade Names

• PRESCRIBE is a registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows 7,
Windows Server 2012, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging
Inc.
• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.
• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of
International Typeface Corporation.
• ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries.
• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
• iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by
Apple Inc.
• Google and Google Cloud Print™ are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
• Mopria™ is registered trademarks of Mopria™ Alliance.
• Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The
designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.
1-8
GPL/LGPL
This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html)
software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify it
under the terms of GPL/LGPL.
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without
prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Original SSLeay License

Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so
as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The
following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the
SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the
holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the
package.
conditions are met:
1-9
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must
include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e.
this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
Monotype Imaging License Agreement

1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as
well as the UFST Software.
2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and
versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or
personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of
this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the
fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from
Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights
are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary
information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access
to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You
agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.
5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License
may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not
remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you
shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as
requested.
6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.
7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with
Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.
Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular
purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is
repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential
damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.
9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
1-10
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written
consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.
Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in
FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and
conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No
change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.
By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
Knopflerfish License
This product includes software developed by the Knopflerfish Project.
http://www.knopflerfish.org
Copyright 2003-2010 The Knopflerfish Project. All rights reserved.
conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
- Neither the name of the KNOPFLERFISH project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Apache License (Version 2.0)

Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1
through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are
under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or
indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of
fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source
code, documentation source, and configuration files.
1-11
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including
but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as
indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix
below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the
Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an
original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or
additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work
by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For
the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the
Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code
control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of
discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been
received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to
You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce,
prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such
Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a
perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent
license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license
applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was
submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent
infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date
such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with
or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
(a)You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b)You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
(c)You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark,
and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works; and
(d)If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute
must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices
that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text
file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the
Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices
normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the
License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an
addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be
construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license
terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as
a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated
in this License.
1-12
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for
inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any
additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any
separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product
names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and
reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and
each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE,
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely
responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated
with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or
otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing,
shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential
damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including
but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other
commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose
to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights
consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on
Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold
each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your
accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets
"[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the
appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of
purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party
archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the
License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS
IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for
the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
1-13
Energy Saving Control Function

The device comes equipped with a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power
consumption is reduced to a minimum after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used. If the
machine is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off.
Sleep (page 2-32)
Power Off Rule (models for Europe) (page 2-33)
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function

This device includes 2-sided printing as a standard function. For example, by printing two 1-sided originals onto a single
sheet of paper as a 2-sided print, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used.
Duplex (page 6-12)
Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex
mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that
machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.
Resource Saving - Paper

For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper
certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002* or
an equivalent quality standard, be used.
This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m2 paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to
further saving of forest resources.
* : EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes"
Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.
Environmental benefits of "Power Management"

To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that
automatically activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time.
Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a
significant reduction in energy consumption is possible. It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation
time for energy-saving mode set to the default setting.
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program

We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this
product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.
ENERGY STAR® is a voluntary energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the
use of products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming. By purchasing
ENERGY STAR® qualified products, customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during
product use and cut energy-related costs.
1-14
2 Installing and Setting
up the Machine
This chapter provides information for the administrator of this machine, such as part names, cable connection, and
software installation.
Part Names (Machine Exterior) ..................... 2-2 Installing Software ....................................... 2-37
Part Names (Connectors/Interior) ................. 2-4 Software on DVD (Windows) ............ 2-37
Part Names (With Optional Equipments Installing Software in Windows ......... 2-38
Attached) ....................................................... 2-6 Uninstalling the Software .................. 2-44
Connecting the Machine and Other Installing Software
Devices ......................................................... 2-7 in Mac Computer .............................. 2-45
Connecting Cables ........................................ 2-8 Setting TWAIN Driver ........................ 2-47
Connecting LAN Cable ....................... 2-8 Setting WIA Driver ............................ 2-49
Connecting USB Cable ....................... 2-9 Checking the Counter ................................. 2-50
Connecting the Power Cable .............. 2-9 Additional Preparations for
Power On/Off .............................................. 2-10 the Administrator ......................................... 2-51
Power On .......................................... 2-10 Sending Documents to a PC ............. 2-51
Power Off .......................................... 2-10 Strengthening the Security ................ 2-51
Using the Operation Panel ........................... 2-11 Embedded Web Server RX ......................... 2-52
Operation Panel Keys ........................ 2-11 Accessing Embedded
Touch Panel ................................................ 2-12 Web Server RX ................................. 2-53
Home Screen .................................... 2-12 Changing Security Settings .............. 2-54
Display for Device Information .......... 2-16 Changing Device Information ........... 2-56
Functions key .................................... 2-17 E-mail Settings .................................. 2-58
Display of Keys That Cannot Registering Destinations ................... 2-62
Be Set ............................................... 2-18 Transferring Data from Our Other
Using the [Enter] key ........................ 2-19 Products ...................................................... 2-63
Using the [Quick No. Search] key ..... 2-19 Migrating the Address Book .............. 2-63
Help Screen ...................................... 2-20
Login/Logout ............................................... 2-21
Login ................................................. 2-21
Logout ............................................... 2-22
Default Settings of the Machine .................. 2-23
Setting Date and Time ...................... 2-23
Network Setup ............................................ 2-24
Configuring the Wired Network ......... 2-24
Configuring the Wireless Network .... 2-26
Setting Wi-Fi Direct ........................... 2-30
Energy Saver function ................................. 2-32
Sleep ................................................. 2-32
Auto Sleep ........................................ 2-32
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ...... 2-33
Sleep Level (Energy Saver and
Quick Recovery) (models except for
Europe) ............................................. 2-33
Power Off Rule (models for Europe) ... 2-33
Quiet Mode ................................................. 2-34
Quick Setup Wizard .................................... 2-35
2-1
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)
Part Names (Machine Exterior)

12 11 10 13 17
9 16
2
15
3
8
4 7
6 14
1 Document Processor 10 Original Eject Table

2 Inner Tray 11 Original Table
3 Paper Stopper 12 Original Width Guides
4 Cassette 1 13 Slit Glass
5 Power Switch 14 Handles
6 Button (Right Cover Open) 15 Operation Panel
7 USB Memory Slot 16 Platen
8 Right Cover 17 Original Size Indicator Plates
9 Original Stopper
2-2
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)
20
18 19
18 Handles
19 Anti-theft Lock Slot
20 Rear Cover 1
2-3
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
1 2
11
10
5
7 8 9
6
1 TEL Connector 7 Paper Width Guides

2 LINE Connector 8 Multipurpose Tray
3 USB Interface Connector 9 Tray Extension
4 Network Interface Connector 10 Paper Width Guides
5 Feed Cover 11 Fuser Cover
6 Paper Length Guide
2-4
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
16
1213 1415
12 Toner Container (Yellow) 15 Toner Container (Black)

13 Toner Container (Cyan) 16 Toner Container Lock Lever
14 Toner Container (Magenta)
2-5
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)
Part Names (With Optional Equipments

Attached)
1 2
1 Cassette 2
2 Rear Cover 2
Optional Equipment (page 11-2)
2-6
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices

Prepare the cables necessary to suit the environment and purpose of the machine use.
When Connecting the Machine to the PC via USB
USB
When Connecting the Machine to the PC or Tablet by network cable, Wi-Fi, or Wi-Fi direct
Network cable
connection
Network Wi-Fi
connection*1
Wi-Fi access point
Wi-Fi Direct
Tablet connection*1
*1 Only for models with Wi-Fi.
NOTE
If you are using wireless LAN, refer to the following.
Configuring the Wireless Network (page 2-26)
Cables that Can Be Used
Connection Environment Function Necessary Cable

Connect a LAN cable to the Printer/Scanner/Network FAX LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
machine. 1000BASE-T)
Connect a USB cable to the Printer/Scanner (TWAIN/WIA) USB 2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB
machine. compliant, max. 5.0 m , shielded)
IMPORTANT
Using a cable other than a USB 2.0 compatible cable may cause failure.
2-7
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting Cables
Connecting LAN Cable
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the power to the machine is turned off.
Power Off (page 2-10)
1 Connect the cable to the machine.

1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub or the PC.
2 Power on the machine and configure the network.

Network Setup (page 2-24)
2-8
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting USB Cable

IMPORTANT
Make sure that the power to the machine is turned off.
Power Off (page 2-10)

1 Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
2 Power on the machine.
Connecting the Power Cable

Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power
outlet.
IMPORTANT
Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
2-9
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off
Power On/Off
Power On
1 Turn the power switch on.
Power Off
1 Turn the power switch off.
The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed.

Show Power Off Message (page 8-19)
It takes approximately 3 minutes for power off.
CAUTION
If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power switch. If the
machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the
outlet as a safety precaution.
IMPORTANT
• Note that turning the machine off at the power switch disables fax transmission and reception.
• Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
2-10
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
Using the Operation Panel

Operation Panel Keys
1 17 16 15 14 13
Select the function. 10:10

Home Admin
Copy Send FAX
Removable Sub
Job Box Address
Memory
Box
Status Task Screen
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 [Home] key: Displays the Home screen.
2 [Status/Job Cancel] key: Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.
3 [System Menu/Counter] key: Displays the System Menu/Counter screen.
4 Touch panel: Displays icons for configuring machine settings.
5 [Processing] indicator: Blinks while printing or sending/receiving.
6 [Memory] indicator: Blinks while the machine is accessing the machine memory or fax memory.
7 [Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.
8 [Enter] key: Finalizes numeric key entry, and finalizes details during setting of functions. Operates linked with the
on-screen [OK].
9 [Start] key: Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.
10 [Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress.
11 [Quiet Mode] key: Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing.
12 [Authentication/Logout] key: Authenticates user switching, and exits the operation for the current user (i.e. log out).
13 [Energy Saver] key: Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode.
14 [Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states.
15 [Clear] key: Clears entered numbers and characters.
16 [Quick No. Search] key: Specifies registered information such as address numbers and user IDs by number.
17 Numeric keys: Enter numbers and symbols.
2-11
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Touch Panel
Home Screen
This screen is displayed by selecting the [Home] key on the operation panel. Touching an icon will display the
corresponding screen.
You can change the icons to display on the Home screen as well as its background.
Editing the Home Screen (page 2-13)
Desktop Task Screen
7 7
1 Select the function. 10:10
1 Select the function. 10:10
Home Admin
6 Home Admin
6
2 8
Copy Send FAX Device Language System
Information Menu
3 3
Removable Sub Favorites
Job Box Address
Memory
4 4
Box
Status Task Screen 5 Status Desktop 9
* The appearance may differ from your actual screen, depending on your configuration and option settings.
No. Item Description

1 Message Displays the message depending on the status.
2 Desktop Displays the function icon. Registered function to favorites are also displayed. Icons that are not
displayed on the first page will appear by changing the page.
3 Screen-switching keys Use these buttons to switch between desktop pages. This is displayed when there are multiple
pages.
4 [Status] Displays the Status screen. If an error occurs, the icon will show "!". Once the error clears, the
display will return to normal.
5 [Task Screen] Displays the Task Screen.
6 [Logout] Logs out the current user. This is displayed when user login administration is enabled.
7 Login User Name Displays the logged-in user name. This is displayed when user login administration is enabled.
Selecting "Login User Name" will display the information of the logged-in user.
8 Task Screen Displays the task icons.
9 [Desktop] Displays the Desktop.
2-12
Editing the Home Screen

You can change the background of the Home screen as well as which icons are displayed.
1 Display the screen.

1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Home]
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in
with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2600
Login Password: 2600
2 Configure the settings.

The available settings are shown below.
Item Description
Customize Desktop Specify the function icons to display on the desktop.*1
Select [ ] to display the screen for selecting the function to display. Select
the function to display and [OK].
Select an icon and [Previous] or [After] to change the display position of the
selected icon on the Desktop.
To delete an icon from desktop, select the desired one and select [ ].
Customize Task Specify the task icons to display on the task screen.*2
Screen
Wallpaper Configure the wallpaper of the Home screen.

Value: Images 1 to 8
*1 Displays a maximum of 43 function icons.

*2 5 task icons can be displayed.
2-13
Available Functions to Display on Desktop
Reference
Function Icon Description
page
Copy*1 Displays the Copy screen. page 5-15
Send*1 Displays the Send screen. page 5-17
FAX*1 Displays the FAX screen. Refer to FAX

Operation
Guide.
Job Box*2 Displays the Job Box screen. page 4-11
Removable Memory*1 Displays the Removable Memory page 5-41

screen.
Sub Address Box*1 Displays the Sub Address Box screen. Refer to FAX
Operation
Guide.
Polling Box*1 Displays the Polling Box screen. Refer to FAX

Operation
Guide.
Send to Me (E-mail)*3 Displays the Send screen. The E-mail page 5-31
address of the logged-in user is set as
the destination.
Favorites Calls up the registered favorite. The icon page 5-8

will change according to the function of
the favorite.
*1 Selected at the time of shipment from factory.

*2 This appears when expansion memory or an SD/SDHC memory card is inserted.
*3 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.
2-14
Available Functions to Display on Task Screen
Reference
Function Icon Description
page
Status/Job Cancel Displays the Status screen. If an error
occurs, the icon will show "!". Once the
-
error clears, the display will return to
normal.
Device Information Displays the Device Information screen. page 2-16

Check the system and network
information.
You can also check information on the
options that are used.
Language Displays the Language setting screen in page 8-5

System Menu.
Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct is set and a list of page 8-26

information relating to the machine that
can use the network appears.
System Menu Displays the System Menu screen. page 8-3
Favorites Displays the favorite list screen. page 5-8
2-15
Display for Device Information

Allows you to check system and network information, as well as options that are used.
1 [Home] key > [Task Screen] > [Device Information]
2 Check the device information.

Device information
Tab Description
Identification/Wired Network You can check ID information such as the model name, serial
number, host name and location, and the IP address.
Wi-Fi You can check ID information such as the model name, serial
number, host name and location, and the IP address of the
wireless network.
FAX You can check the local fax number, local fax name, local fax
ID and other fax information.
Software Ver./Capability You can check the software version and performance.
Option You can check information on the options that are used.
2-16
Functions key
This screen appears when the Functions icon is selected.
Ready to copy. (Full Color) 10:10 1 Display functions.

Copy Copies
1 Paper Zoom Density

2 Select [Functions] to display other functions.
Selection
A4 100% Normal 0 3 Select [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.
Duplex Combine Color
Selection
1-sided>>1-sided Off Full Color
2 Functions Favorites
Ready to copy. (Full Color) 10:10

Functions
Collate
On
3
Original Size
A4
1/5
Original Orientation
Top Edge on Top
Mixed Size Originals
Off
Close Add/Edit
Shortcut
2-17
Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set

Keys of features that cannot be used due to feature combination restrictions or non-installation of options are in a
non-selectable state.
Normal Grayed out
Ready to copy. (Full Color) 10:10 Ready to to

Ready copy.
copy. (Full Color) 10:10
Copy Copies Copy Copies
Paper Zoom Density Paper Zoom Density

Selection Selection
A4 100% Normal 0 A4 100% Normal 0
Duplex Combine Color Duplex Combine Collate

Color
Selection Selection
1-sided>>1-sided Off Full Color 1-sided>>1-sided Off Off
Full Color
Functions Favorites Functions Favorites
In the following cases, the key is grayed out

and cannot be selected.
• Cannot be used in combination with a
feature that is already selected.
NOTE
If a key that you wish to use is grayed out, the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. In this case, select
the [Reset] key and try again.
2-18
Using the [Enter] key

The [Enter] key has the same function as the key with the Enter mark ( ), such as the [OK  ] key and the [Close  ].

EcoPrint
Off On
Cancel OK
Using the [Quick No. Search] key

The [Quick No. Search] key is used when using the numeric keys to directly enter the number, for example, when
specifying the destination for the transmission using a speed-dial number.
For more information on speed dialing, refer to the following:
Specifying Destination (page 5-33)
10:10
One Touch Key No. Entry
(001 - 100)
Cancel OK
2-19
Help Screen
If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel.
When the [?] (help) is displayed on the touch panel, you can select it to display the Help screen. The Help screen shows
explanations of functions and how to use them.
Example: Checking the paper selection Help screen
1 Display the Paper Selection screen.

2
Ready to copy. (Full Color) 10:10 Ready to copy. (Full Color) 10:10
Paper Selection Paper Selection
Auto
A4 Plain
1/2 1/2
A4 Plain
A4 Plain
Cancel OK
1 Help titles
1
Paper Selection
2 4 2 Displays information about functions

and machine operation.
1/2 3 Closes the Help screen and returns to
the original screen.
4 Scrolls up and down when the help
text cannot be displayed in its entirety
3 on a single screen.
2-20
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Login/Logout
If you are setting a function that requires administrator rights, or if user login administration is enabled, you must enter
your login user name and login password.
NOTE
You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator
privileges and change your login user name or login password.
Login
Normal login
1 Enter the login user name and login password to login.

1 If this screen is displayed during operations, select [Keyboard] to enter the login user
name.
Enter login user name and password. 10:10
Login User Name

Keyboard
Login Password
Keyboard
Login
Character Entry Method (page 11-8)
2 [Password] > Enter the login password > [OK]
NOTE
If [Network Authentication] is selected as the user authentication method,
authentication destinations are displayed and either [Local] or [Network] can be
selected as the authentication destination.
2 Select [Login].
2-21
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Simple Login
Select the user to login. 10:10
01 A 02 B 03 C
04 None 05 None 06 None

1/3
Menu
If this screen is displayed during operations, select a user and log in.
NOTE
If a user password is required, an input screen will be displayed.
Simple Login Settings (page 9-23)
Logout
To logout from the machine, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user
name/login password entry screen.
Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:
• When the machine enters the sleep state.
• When the auto panel reset function is activated.
2-22
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Default Settings of the Machine

Before using this machine, configure such settings as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions
as needed. The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the equipment is turned on for the first time after being
installed. Also, configure the following settings if necessary.
NOTE
The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu.
For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to the following:
Setup and Registration (System Menu) (page 8-1)
Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.
When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of
the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.
NOTE
• To make changes after this initial configuration, refer to the following:
Date/Timer/Energy Saver (page 8-38)
• The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]

[Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format]
Item Description
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from
the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings
for summer time.
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you
perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on
the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31),
Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed
in Western notation.
Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day
2-23
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup
Network Setup
Configuring the Wired Network
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4),
TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms.
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.
Be sure to connect the network cable before configuring the settings.
Connecting LAN Cable (page 2-8)

For other network settings, refer to the following:
Network (page 8-26)
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and
password, and select [Login].
IPv4 setting

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wired Network Settings]
> [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4]
When using DHCP server

[DHCP]: Set to [On].
When setting the static IP address

[DHCP]: Set to [Off].
[IP Address]: Enter the address.
[Subnet Mask]: Enter the subnet mask in decimal representation (0 to 255).
[Default Gateway]: Enter the address.
[Auto-IP]: Set to [Off].
When using the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the
machine OFF and then ON.
2-24
NOTE
Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you
configure this setting.
In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS server on the Embedded Web Server RX.
• When using the host name with "DHCP" setting set to "Off"
• When using the DNS server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically.
Setting the IP Address of the DNS Server, refer to the following:
2-25
Configuring the Wireless Network

When the connection settings are configured, it is possible to print or send in a wireless network (wireless LAN)
environment. The configuration methods are as follows:
Configuration Method Description Reference Page

Configuring the Connection Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the network in a Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-35)
from the Operation Panel on wizard-style screen, without setting individually in System
This Machine menu.
Use Wi-Fi Settings or Wireless Network to configure the Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-26)
network in details from System menu.
Setting the Connection by This is the tool included in the Product Library. You can Setting the Connection by Using
Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool configure the connection according to the instructions the Wi-Fi Setup Tool (page 2-26)
provided by the wizard.
Configuring Connections on The connection can be set from the Embedded Web Embedded Web Server RX
the Web Page Server RX. User Guide
NOTE
Change the settings in "Primary Network (Client)" appropriately if you switch to other than a wired network interface.
Interface Block Setting (page 8-36)
Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or handheld device
with the machine locally. The connection methods are wired connection via LAN cable and wireless LAN connection
(Wi-Fi Direct).
NOTE
• Before using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool, connect your computer to this machine locally with wired LAN cable or Wi-Fi
Direct.
• To use Wi-Fi Direct, confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct is enabled (Wi-Fi Direct is set to [ON]) and Restart Network from
the operation panel, before your computer will be connected to this machine with Wi-Fi Direct.
• To use a wired LAN cable directly connected to the machine, the Auto-IP (Link-local) address will be assigned to the
machine and the computer. This machine applies Auto-IP as the default settings.
• Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS.
Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-26)
Wired Connection by Using LAN Cable
1 Connect the machine with a computer

1 Connect the machine with a computer via LAN cable when the machine is powered on.
2 Turn on the computer.

IP address (link local address) of the machine and computer is generated automatically.
2-26
2 Insert the DVD.
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select [Cancel].
• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1 Click [View License Agreement]
and read the License Agreement.
2 Click [Accept].
1 2
4 Select [Maintenance].
5 [Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]

1 [Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]
2 [Use LAN cable] > [Next] > [Next]
2-27
3 [Easy setup] > [Next]

The machine is detected.
NOTE
• Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup Tool. It may take times to search
the machine.
• If the machine is not detected, select [Advanced setup] > [Next]. Select [Express] or
[Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or host name to
search the machine.
4 Select the machine > [Next]
5 Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user
name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.
6 Configure the communication settings > [Next]
7 Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.
Wireless LAN Connection by Using Wi-Fi Direct

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct Settings] >
[Wi-Fi Direct]

[On] > [OK]
3 Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Restart Network] > [Yes]
4 Connect a computer or a handheld device with the machine.

Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-30)
5 Insert the DVD.
NOTE
2-28

2 Click [Accept].
1 2
7 Select [Maintenance].
8 [Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]

1 [Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]
2 [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Next] > [Next]
3 [Advanced setup] > [Next]

Select [Express] or [Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or host name
to search the machine.
4 Select the machine > [Next]
5 Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user
name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.
6 Configure the communication settings > [Next]
7 Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.
2-29
Setting Wi-Fi Direct

Setting Wi-Fi Direct enables you to print from the Wi-Fi Direct environment. The configuration methods are as follows:
Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine
Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices that Support Wi-Fi Direct

[Wi-Fi Direct]

[On] > [OK]

4 Specify the machine name from the computer or handheld

device.
If a confirmation message appears on the operation panel of the machine, select [Yes].
The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.
Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices Unsupported Wi-Fi Direct

Here, we'll explain the procedures for connecting to iOS handheld devices.

[Wi-Fi Direct]

[On] > [OK]

4 [Home] key > [Task Screen] > [Wi-Fi Direct]
5 Note the network name (SSID), IP address, and password.
6 Configure the handheld device.

1 [Settings] > [Wi-Fi]
2 Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 5 from the list.
3 Enter the password that was provided in step 5 > [Connect]

The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.
2-30
Configuring the Connection by Using Push Button

When your computer or handheld device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can configure the
network using push button.

[Wi-Fi Direct]

[On] > [OK]

4 [Home] key > [Task Screen] > [Wi-Fi Direct]
5 Press the push button on the computer or handheld device and

select [Push Button] on the screen of operation panel
simultaneously.
The network between this machine and the computer or handheld device is configured.
IMPORTANT
You can connect up to three handheld devices at the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting. When the devices
that support Wi-Fi Direct are connected, if you want to connect other device, disconnect the
already-connected devices from the network. The disconnection methods are as follows:
• Disconnect the network from the computer or handheld computer
• Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel
Select [Home] key > [Task Screen] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Connected Device List] > [Disconnect All]
• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu
Wi-Fi Direct Settings (page 8-26)
• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the Embedded Web Server RX
2-31
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function
Energy Saver function

If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters sleep mode, which
minimizes power consumption. If the machine is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off.
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and
password, and select [Login].
Sleep
To enter Sleep, select the [Energy Saver] key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save
a maximum amount of power except the Energy Saver indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.
Energy Saver indicator
If print data is received during Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
To resume, perform the following actions.
• Select the [Energy Saver] key.
The machine will be ready to operate within 13 seconds.
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.
Auto Sleep
Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time.
The amount of time before entering Sleep is as follows.
• 1 minute (default setting).
To change the preset sleep time, refer to the following:
Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-35)
2-32
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function
Sleep Rules (models for Europe)

You can set whether sleep mode operates for each function. When the machine enters sleep mode, the ID card cannot
be recognized.
For more information on Sleep Rules settings, refer to the following:
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-39)
Sleep Level (Energy Saver and Quick Recovery)

(models except for Europe)
For sleep level, you can toggle between the following two modes: Energy Saver mode and Quick Recovery mode. The
default setting is Energy Saver mode.
Energy Saver mode reduces power consumption even more than Quick Recovery mode, and allows Sleep Mode to be
set separately for each function. The ID card cannot be recognized.
To resume, select the [Energy Saver] key on the operation panel. If print data is received during Sleep, the machine
automatically wakes up and starts printing.
For more information on Sleep Level settings, refer to the following:
Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-35)
Power Off Rule (models for Europe)

The Power Off Rule is used to stop the power from automatically turning off.
The default preset time is 3days.
For more information on Power Off Rule settings, refer to the following:
Power Off Rule (models for Europe) (page 8-40)
2-33
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quiet Mode
Quiet Mode
Lower print speed for quiet processing. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.
When the [Quiet Mode] key is selected, the [Quiet Mode] key blinks and Quiet Mode is enabled.
[Quiet Mode] key
NOTE
The processing speed will be slower than normal when in Quiet Mode.
2-34
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard
Quick Setup Wizard

For FAX functions, paper settings, Energy Saver functions and network settings, the following settings can be configured
in a wizard-style screen.
FAX Setup Configures basic fax settings.
FAX Operation Guide
1. Dialing/RX Mode Dialing Mode*1

Reception Mode
Auto (DRD)*2
2. Local FAX Info. Local FAX Name

Local FAX Number
Local FAX ID
TTI
3. Sound Speaker Volume

Monitor Volume
Job Finish Buzzer
4. Rings Normal*3
Answering Machine*3
FAX/TEL Switch*3
5. Redial Retry Times
Paper Setup Configures the paper size and media type of paper to be used in cassettes and multipurpose tray.
1. Cassette 1 Paper Size

Media Type
2. Cassette 2*4 Paper Size

Media Type
3. MP Tray Paper Size

Media Type
Energy Saver Setup Configures sleep mode.
1. Sleep Mode Sleep Timer

Sleep Level (models except for Europe)
Network Setup Configures network settings.
1. Network Wi-Fi Wi-Fi

Available Network
Wired Network Obtain IP Address

IP Address*5
Subnet Mask*5
Default Gateway*5
*1 Inch version only.

*2 DRD reception mode is available for some countries.
*3 This setting does not appear in some regions.
*4 Displayed only when the optional paper feeder is installed.
*5 Not displayed when "Obtain IP Address" is set to [Auto (DHCP)].
2-35
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,
you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as
shown below.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Quick Setup Wizard]
2 Select a function.

Start the wizard. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings.
NOTE
If you experience difficulty configuring the settings, refer to the following:
Help Screen (page 2-20)
Control Description
End Exits the wizard. Settings configured so far are applied.
Previous Returns to the previous item.
Skip Advances to the next item without setting the current item.
Next Advances to the next screen.
Back Returns to the previous screen.
Complete Register the settings and exit the wizard.
2-36
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of
this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.
Software on DVD (Windows)

You can use either [Express Install] or [Custom Install] can be selected for the installation method. [Express Install] is
the standard installation method. To install components that cannot be installed by [Express Install], use [Custom Install].
For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:
Custom Install (page 2-40)
Express
Software Description
Install
Printing System Driver This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine.
Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are supported by
a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full advantage of the
features of the machine.
Use this driver to create PDF files.
Printing System (XPS) Driver This printer driver supports the XPS (XML Paper Specification) format -
developed by Microsoft Corporation.
KPDL mini-driver/PCL This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There are some -
mini-driver restrictions on the machine features and option features that can be used
with this driver.
FAX Driver This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer software -
application as a fax via the machine.
TWAIN Driver This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAIN-compliant
software application.
WIA Driver WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows that enables -
reciprocal communication between an imaging device such as a scanner
and an image processing software application. An image can be acquired
using a WIA-compliant software application, which is convenient when a
TWAIN-compliant software application is not installed in the computer.
NETWORK PRINT MONITOR This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the network. -
Status Monitor This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing
reporting function.
File Management Utility This makes it possible to send and save a scanned document to a specified -
network folder.
Network Tool for Direct Printing This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe -
Acrobat/Reader.
FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts to be used in
a software application.
NOTE
• WIA Driver and Printing System (XPS) Driver cannot be installed on Windows XP.
2-37
Installing Software in Windows

Express Install
The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Express Install].
For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:
Custom Install (page 2-40)
1 Insert the DVD.
NOTE

2 Click [Accept].
1 2
3 Select [Express Install].
2-38
4 Install the software.
You can also select [Use host name for port name] and set to use the host name of the
standard TCP/IP port. (A USB connection cannot be used.)
IMPORTANT
If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port name.
Installation may fail if the host name is specified.
NOTE
• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the
machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it
is turned on and click (Reload).
• If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].
• To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8, it is necessary to
install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.
2-39
5 Finish the installation.
When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test
page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.
Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.
NOTE
When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting
will appear after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the
machine. Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed.
Printing System Driver User Guide
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.
This completes the printer driver installation procedure.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:
Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-47)
Custom Install
The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Custom Install].
1 Insert the DVD.
NOTE
2-40

2 Click [Accept].
1 2
3 Select [Custom Install].
4 Install the software.

1 Select the device to be installed.
1
2
IMPORTANT
If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port name.
Installation may fail if the host name is specified.
NOTE
• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the
machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and
that it is turned on and click (Reload).
• If the desired device does not appear, select [Add custom device] to directly select
the device.
2-41
2 Select the driver to be installed.
2
3
3 Click [Utility] tab and select the utility to be installed.
3
2
4 Click [Install].
2-42
NOTE
To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8, it is necessary to
install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.
5 Finish the installation.
When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test
page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.
Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.
NOTE
When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting
will appear after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the
machine. Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed.
This completes the printer driver installation procedure.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:
2-43
Uninstalling the Software

Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer.
NOTE
Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Uninstall Product Library" in the search box. Select
[Uninstall Product Library] in the search list.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [All Programs], [(name
of offer company)], and [Uninstall Product Library] to display the Uninstall Wizard.
2 Uninstall the software.

Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted.
3 Finish uninstalling.
This completes the software uninstallation procedure.
NOTE
• The software can also be uninstalled using the Product Library.
• In the Product Library screen, click [Uninstall], and follow the on-screen instructions to
uninstall the software.
2-44
Installing Software in Mac Computer

The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Mac computer.
NOTE
• Installation on Mac OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].
Printer (page 8-24)
• If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.
Bonjour (page 8-30)
• In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.
• When printing via AirPrint, you do not have to install the software.
1 Insert the DVD.
Double-click the [GEN_LIB] icon.
2
1
Double-click [(Brand Name) OS X x.x] depending on your Mac OS version.
3 Install the Printer Driver.
Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.
This completes the printer driver installation.
If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected.
If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.
2-45
4 Configure the printer.

1 Open System Preferences and add the printer.
1 2
2 Select [Default] and click the item that appears in "Name" and then select the driver in
"Use".
1
2
3
4
NOTE
When using an IP connection, click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the
host name or IP address. The number entered in "Address" will automatically appear in
"Name". Change if needed.
3 Select the options available for the machine.
4 The selected machine is added.
2-46
Setting TWAIN Driver

Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1 Click [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Select
[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list. TWAIN Driver screen appears.
NOTE
In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [(Brand Name)]
and then [TWAIN Driver Setting].
2 Click [Add].
2 Configure TWAIN Driver.

(Network) (USB)
1 1 3
2 4 2
3
4
6 5
1 Enter the machine name. 1 Enter the machine name.
2 Select this machine from the list. 2 Select this machine from the list.
3 Enter the machine's IP address or host 3 Set units of measurement.
name.
4 Set the Compression Level.
4 Set units of measurement.
5 Click [OK].
5 When using SSL, select the checkbox
beside SSL.
6 Click [OK].
NOTE
When the machine's IP address or host name is unknown, contact Administrator.
2-47
3 Finish registering.
NOTE
Click [Delete] to delete the added machine. Click [Edit] to change names.
2-48
Setting WIA Driver

Register this machine to the WIA Driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1 Click [Search] in charms, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the search box.
Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras
screen appears.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and
File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners
and Cameras screen appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click [Properties].
1 2
2 Configure WIA Driver.

(Network) (USB)
1 1
2 2
3
4
5 3 4
1 Click the [Settings] tab. 1 Click the [Settings] tab.

2 Enter the machine IP addresses or host 2 Set the Compression Level.
name.
3 When using SSL, select the checkbox
4 Click [OK].
beside SSL.
5 Click [OK].
2-49
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Checking the Counter
Checking the Counter

Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Counter]
2 Check the counter.
2-50
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Additional Preparations for the Administrator

In addition to the information provided in this chapter, the administrator of this machine should check the following, and
configure the settings as needed.
Sending Documents to a PC
To Send to a Shared Folder (Send to Folder (SMB))
To send a document that has been loaded, you need to create a shared folder to receive the document on your computer.
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-10)
To E-mail Scanned Images (Send as E-mail)

You can send a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
E-mail Settings (page 2-58)
Strengthening the Security

This machine is shipped with two default users registered one with Machine Administrator rights, and another with
Administrator rights.Logging in as this user will allow you to configure all settings; therefore, please change the login
user name and password.
In addition, this machine is equipped with user authentication function, which can be configured to limit the access to this
machine to only those who have a registered login name and password.
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 9-1)
I want to... Function Reference page

Restrict the users of the machine. User Login page 9-2
Auto Panel Reset page 8-38
ID Card Settings*1 page 9-25
Restrict the basic functions that can be used. Group Authorization Set. page 9-15
Prevent the data stored in the machine from PDF Encryption Functions page 6-28
being leaked.
Protect the transmission from interception and IPP over SSL page 8-33
wiretapping.
HTTPS page 8-32
LDAP Security Refer to the

Embedded Web
Server RX User
Guide.
SMTP Security page 8-35
POP3 Security page 8-35
FTP Encrypted TX page 6-33
Enhanced WSD over SSL page 8-34
IPSec page 8-30
SNMPv3 page 8-32
*1 The optional Card Authentication Kit is required.
2-51
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Embedded Web Server RX
Embedded Web Server RX

If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Embedded Web Server RX.
This section explains how to access Embedded Web Server RX, and how to change security settings and the host
name.
NOTE
To fully access the features of the Embedded Web Server RX pages, enter the User Name and Password and click
[Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box,
Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator
privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Embedded Web Server RX are as follows.
Administ- General
Setting Description
rator User
Device The machine's structure can be checked.
Information
Job Status Displays all device information, including print and scan jobs, storing jobs,
scheduled jobs, and job log history.
Document Box*1 Configures settings related to the Job Box. -

*2
Address Book Create, edit, or delete addresses and address groups.
Device Settings Configure the advanced settings of the machine. -
Function Settings Configure the advanced function settings. -
Network Settings Configure the network advanced settings. -
Security Settings Configure the security advanced settings. -
Management Configure the advanced management settings. -

Settings
*1 Expansion memory or an SD/SDHC memory card is required.

*2 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the permissions of the user.
NOTE
Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted.
FAX Operation Guide
2-52
Accessing Embedded Web Server RX

1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
Examples: https://192.168.48.21/ (for IP address)

https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")
The web page displays basic information about the machine and Embedded Web Server RX
as well as their current status.
NOTE
If the screen "There is a problem with this website's security certificate." is displayed,
configure the certificate.
You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.
2 Configure the function.

Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen.
NOTE
To fully access the features of the Embedded Web Server RX pages, enter the User Name
and Password and click [Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the
user to access all pages, including Document Box, Address Book, and Settings on the
navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges
is shown below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
2-53
Changing Security Settings

3 Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper
case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
4 Click [Security Settings].
2-54
2 Configure the Security Settings.

From the [Security Settings] menu, select the setting you want to configure.
NOTE
For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the following:
2-55
Changing Device Information

4 From the [Device Settings] menu, click [System].
2-56
2 Specify the host name.

Enter the device information, and then click [Submit].
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
To restart the network, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings] menu, and then
click [Restart Network] in "Restart".
2-57
E-mail Settings
By configuring the SMTP settings, it is possible to send the images scanned by the machine as E-mail attachments and
to send E-mail notices when jobs have been completed.
To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
In addition, configure the following.
• SMTP settings
Item: "SMTP Protocol" and "SMTP Server Name" in "SMTP"
• The sender address when the machine sends E-mails
Item: "Sender Address" in "E-mail Send Settings"
• The setting to limit the size of E-mails
Item: "E-mail Size Limit" in "E-mail Send Settings"
The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.

Display the SMTP Protocol screen.
2-58
4 From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocol].

Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" to [On] in the "Send Protocols".
2-59

Display the E-mail Settings screen.
From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].
2-60

Enter "SMTP" and "E-mail Send Settings" items.
Setting Description
SMTP Set to send e-mail from the machine.
SMTP Protocol Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that "SMTP
Protocol" is set to [On]. If [Off] is set, click [Protocol] and set
the SMTP protocol to [On].
SMTP Server Name*1 Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
SMTP Port Number Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default
port number is 25.
SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.
Authentication To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for

Protocol authentication.
SMTP Security Set SMTP security.

Turn on "SMTP Security" in "SMTP (E-mail TX)" on the
[Protocol Settings] page.
Connection Test Tests to confirm that the E-mail function is operating under
the settings without sending a mail.
Domain Restriction To restrict the domains, click the [Domain List] and enter
the domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected.
Restriction can also be specified by e-mail address.
POP3 POP3 Protocol You don't need to set the following items when you only
enable the function of sending e-mail from the machine. Set
Check Interval the following items if you want to enable the function of
receiving e-mail on the machine.
Run once now
Domain Restriction
POP3 User Settings
E-mail E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in
Send kilobytes. When E-mail size is greater than this value, an
Settings error message appears and E-mail sending is cancelled.
Use this setting if you have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP
server. If not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail
sending regardless of the size limit.
Sender Address*1 Specify the sender address for when the machine sends
E-mails, such as the machine administrator, so that a reply
or non-delivery report will go to a person rather than to the
machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for
SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender
address is 128 characters.
Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will
appear at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for
further identification of the machine. The maximum length of
the signature is 512 characters.
Function Defaults Change the function default settings in [Common/Job

Default Settings] page.
*1 Be sure to enter the items.
5 Click [Submit].
2-61
Registering Destinations

4 From the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].
1
2
5 Click [Add].
2 Populate the fields.

1 Enter the destination information.
Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the same as
when registering via operation panel.
Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-20)
2 Click [Submit].
2-62
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
Transferring Data from Our Other Products

By using the machine's utility, you can smoothly migrate address books when the machine is to be replaced.
This section explains how to transfer data between our products.
Migrating the Address Book

The Address Book registered on the machine can be backed up or migrated using the NETWORK PRINT MONITOR on
the included DVD.
For details on operating the NETWORK PRINT MONITOR, refer to the following:
NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide
Backing Up Address Book Data to PC
1 Launch the NETWORK PRINT MONITOR.
2 Create a backup.
1 Right-click on the model name from which you want to back up the Address Book, and
select [Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].
2 Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].
2-63
3 Select destination device group and click [Next].
4 Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
5 Select [Create from device] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on
target device], and then click [Next].
2
3
2-64
6 Select the model you want to back up, and click [Next].
NOTE
If the "Admin Login" screen appears, enter the "Admin Login" and "Login Password", and
then click [OK]. The default settings are as follows (Upper case and lower case letters
are distinguished (case sensitive)).
7 Click on [Save to file].
8 Specify the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click [Save].
For "Save as type", make sure to select "XML File".
2-65
9 After saving the file, always click [Cancel] to close the screen.
Please note that selecting [Finish] will write the data to the machine's Address Book.
Writing Address Book Data to the Machine
1 Launch the NETWORK PRINT MONITOR.
2 Load the Address Book data.

1 Right-click on the model name to which you want to transfer the Address Book, and select
[Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].
2 Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].
2-66
3 Select destination device group and click [Next].
4 Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
5 Select [Create from file] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target
device], and then click [Next].
2
3
Selecting the [Overwrite settings on target device] checkbox will overwrite the machine's
Address Book from entry No.1.
2-67
6 Click [Browse] and select the backup Address Book file, and then click [Next].
7 Click [Finish].
The write process of the Address Book data starts.
8 Once the write process is complete, click [Close]
2-68
3 Preparation before Use
This chapter explains the following operations.
Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Precaution for Loading Paper .................................................................................................................. 3-2
Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................................................ 3-3
Loading in the Cassette 1 ........................................................................................................................ 3-4
Loading in the Cassette 2 ........................................................................................................................ 3-7
Precautions for Outputting Paper ....................................................................................................................... 3-9
Paper Stopper .......................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC ................................................................... 3-10
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name .............................................................. 3-10
Making a note of the user name and domain name ............................................................................... 3-11
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ............................................................... 3-12
Configuring Windows Firewall ............................................................................................................... 3-15
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................................. 3-20
Adding a Destination (Address Book) .................................................................................................... 3-20
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) ................................................................... 3-26
3-1
Preparation before Use > Loading Paper
Loading Paper
Precaution for Loading Paper
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.
Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface.

In addition, note the following points.
• If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded
may cause a jam.
• Avoid exposing opened paper to high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems.
Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multipurpose tray or cassettes back in the
paper storage bag.
• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by
removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
IMPORTANT
If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for printing), do not use paper that is
stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image
quality.
NOTE
If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like
logo or company name, refer to the following:
Paper (page 11-11)
3-2
Selecting the Paper Feeder Units

Select the paper feeder units according to the size and type of paper.
1
2
No. Name Paper Size Paper Type Capacity Page

1 Cassette 1 A4, B5, A5-R, A5, A6, B6, Legal, Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, 250 sheets page 3-4
Oficio II, Letter, Executive, Statement-R, Rough, Letterhead, Color, (80 g/m2)
2 Cassette 2 Folio, 16K, 216mm×340mm, B5(ISO), Prepunched, Thick, High Quality, page 3-7
Custom Custom 1 to 8
NOTE
• The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type.
• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper
jams or other faults.)
• For higher quality color printing, use special color paper.
3-3
Loading in the Cassette 1

1 Pull the Cassette 1 completely out of the machine.
2 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.
When using Folio, Oficio II or Legal
NOTE
In some regions the cassette comes with a cover. If the cassette has a cover, open the
cover to adjust the guide.
3-4
3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left
and right sides of the Cassette 1.
4 Load paper.
NOTE
If the cassette has a cover, close the cover.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
multipurpose tray.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled
or folded may cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration
above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,
the paper may skew or become jammed.
3-5
5 Gently push the Cassette 1 back in.
NOTE
When Folio, Oficio II, or Legal is used, the cassette will extend out from the machine.

[System Menu/Counter] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings]

Select the paper size and paper type.
Cassette 1 (2) (page 8-8)
3-6
Loading in the Cassette 2

1 Pull the Cassette 2 completely out of the machine.
2 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.
3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left
and right sides of the Cassette 2.
3-7
4 Load paper.
IMPORTANT
multipurpose tray.
above).
5 Gently push the Cassette 2 back in.

[System Menu/Counter] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings]

Select the paper size and paper type
3-8
Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper
Precautions for Outputting Paper

Paper Stopper
When using paper large than B5/Letter, open the paper stopper shown in the figure.
3-9
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Preparation for Sending a Document to a

Shared Folder in a PC
Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your
computer. Screens of Windows 8.1 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other
versions of Windows.
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
Making a note of the computer name and full

computer name
Check the name of the computer name and full computer name.

In Windows 8.1, right-click [PC] in the Start screen and select [Properties]. Or, right-click the
Window icon and select [System].
In Windows 8, select the desktop in the Start screen, right-click [Computer] from [Libraries],
and then select [Properties].
NOTE
In Windows XP, right-click [My Computer] and select [Properties]. The [System
Properties] dialog box appears. Click the [Computer Name] tab in the window that
appears.
In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Computer] and then [System
Properties].
In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [System].
2 Check the computer name.
Check the computer name and full computer name.

Screen example:
Computer name: PC001
Full computer name: PC001.abcdnet.com
Windows XP:
If the full computer name does not have a dot (.), the full computer name and the computer
name are the same.
If the full computer name has a dot (.), the text string in front of the dot (.) in the full computer
name is the computer name.
Example: PC001.abcdnet.com
PC001 is the computer name
PC001.abcdnet.com is the full computer name
After checking the computer name, click the [Close] button to close the
"System Properties" screen.
In Windows XP, after checking the computer name, click the [Cancel] button to close the
"System Properties" screen.
3-10
Making a note of the user name and domain name

Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.

Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Command Prompt" in the search box. Select [Command
Prompt] in the search list.
In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [All Programs] (or [Programs]),
[Accessories] and then [Command Prompt].
In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Command Prompt].
The Command Prompt window appears.
2 Check the domain name and user name.

At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].
Check the user name and domain name.

Screen example:
User Name: james.smith
Domain Name: ABCDNET
3-11
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder

Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.
NOTE
If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group.
1 Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], [Appearance and
Personalization], and then [Folder Options].
In Windows XP, click [My Computer] and select [Folder Options] in [Tools].
In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Appearance
and Personalization], and then [Folder Options].
In Windows 10, open up a window in File Explorer and select [View], [Options], and then
[Folder Options].
1 Make sure that the [View] tab is selected.
3
Remove the checkmark from [Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)] in "Advanced
settings".
In Windows XP, click the [View] tab and remove the checkmark from
[Use Simple File Sharing (Recommended)] in "Advanced settings".
1 Create a folder.
Create a folder on your computer.
For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the desktop.
3-12
2 Configure permission settings.

1 Right-click the "scannerdata" folder, select [Property], and click [Sharing] and
[Advanced Sharing].
In Windows XP, right-click the "scannerdata" folder and select [Sharing and Security] (or
[Sharing]).
2 Select the [Share this folder] checkbox and click the [Permissions] button.
In Windows XP, select [Share this folder] and click the [Permissions] button.
3 Make a note of the [Share name].
4 Click the [Add] button.
3-13
5 Specify the location.
1 If the computer name that you made a note of on page is the same as the domain
name:
If the computer name is not shown in "From this location", click the [Locations] button,
select the computer name, and click the [OK] button.
Example: PC001
If the computer name that you made a note of on page is not the same as the domain
name:
If the text after the first dot (.) in the full computer name that you made a note of does
not appear in "From this location", click the [Locations] button, select the text after the
dot (.), and click the [OK] button.
Example: abcdnet.com
Making a note of the user name and domain name (page 3-11)
2 Enter the user name that you made a note of on page in the text box, and click the [OK]
button.
Also the user name can be made by clicking the [Advanced] button and selecting a
user.
5 Set the access permission for the user selected.
1 Select the user you entered.

2 Select the [Allow] checkbox of the
1 "Change" and "Read" permissions
3 Press [OK].
3
In Windows XP, go to step 7.
NOTE
"Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen
security, it is recommended that you select "Everyone" and remove the "Read" [Allow]
checkmark.
6 Click the [OK] button in the "Advanced Sharing" screen to close the screen.
3-14
7 Check the details set in the [Security] tab.
1 Select the [Security] tab.

1
2 Select the user you entered.
If the user does not appear on "Group or
2 user names", click [Edit] button to add user
in a similar way of "configuration of
permission settings".
3 Make sure that checkmarks appear on
[Allow] checkbox for the "Modify" and
3 "Read & execute" permissions.
4 Click the [Close] button.
4
In Windows XP, make sure that checkmarks appear on [Allow] checkbox for the "Modify"
and "Read & execute" permissions, and click the [OK] button.
Configuring Windows Firewall

Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
1 Check file and printer sharing.

1 In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and then
[Windows Firewall].
NOTE
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
3-15
2 Select the [File and Printer Sharing] checkbox.
2 Add a port.
1 In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and
[Check firewall status].
2 Select [Advanced settings].
3 Select [Inbound Rules].
3-16
4 Select [New Rules].
5 Select [Port].
6 Select [TCP] as the port to apply the rule to. Then select [Specific local ports] and enter
"445" then click [Next].
3-17
7 Select [Allow the connection] and click the [Next] button.
8 Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click the [Next] button.
9 Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click [Finish].
3-18
In Windows 7
1 From [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [System and Security], and
[Allow a program through Windows Firewall].

Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-15)
In Windows XP or Windows Vista
1 In Windows XP, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], and then
[Windows Firewall].
In Windows Vista, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Security],
and then [Turn Windows Firewall on or off].
2 Click the [Exceptions] tab and then the [Add port...] button.
3 Specify Add a Port settings.

Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). This will be the name of the new port.
Enter "445" in "Port Number". Select [TCP] for "Protocol".
4 Click [OK] button.
In Windows 10
1 Right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Control Panel], [System and
Security], and then [Allow an app through Windows Firewall].

3-19
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be changed.
The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission.
NOTE
Registering and editing of the Address Book can also be done in Embedded Web Server RX.
Registering Destinations (page 2-62)
Adding a Destination (Address Book)

Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a
group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Registering a contact address

A maximum of 100 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as destination
name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book] > [ ]>
[Contact]
2 Add the name.

Enter the destination name to be displayed on the Address Book > [Next]
NOTE
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
3 Add the address.

E-mail Address
[E-mail Address] > Enter the E-mail address > [OK]
NOTE
3-20
The Folder (SMB) Address

[SMB] > [Host Name], [Path], [Port], [Login User Name] and [Login Password] > [OK]
NOTE
For the computer name, share name, domain name, and user name, enter the information
that you noted when you created the shared folder. For details on creating shared folders,
refer to the following:
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-10)
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Max. No. of
Item Description
Characters
Host Name Computer name Up to
64 characters
Path Share name Up to

For example: scannerdata 128 characters
If saving in a folder in the shared folder:
share name\folder name in shared folder
Port Port number 1 - 65535

(Normally 445.)
Login User Name If the computer name and domain name are the same: Up to
User Name 64 characters
For example: james.smith
If the computer name and domain name are different:
Domain name\User name
For example: abcdnet\james.smith
Login Password Windows logon password Up to

(Case sensitive.) 64 characters
To search for a folder on a PC on the network, select in the following order.

[Menu] > [Search Folder from Network] or [Search Folder by Host Name]
If you selected [Search Folder from Network], you can search all PCs on the network for a
destination.
If you selected [Search Folder by Host Name], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup
Name", and "Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.
Up to 500 addresses can be displayed. The login user name and login password entry screen
appears.
Select the host name (PC name) that you want to specify in the screen that appears > [Next].
NOTE
• Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
• Select [Menu] > [Connection Test] to check the connection to the server you chose. If the
connection fails, check the entries you made.
3-21
The Folder (FTP) Address

[FTP] > [Host Name], [Path], [Port], [Login User Name] and [Login Password] > [OK]
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Max. No. of
Item Descriptions
Characters
Host Name Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to
64 characters
Path*1 Path for the file to be stored Up to

For example: User\ScanData 128 characters
If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.
Port Port number 1 - 65535

(Normally 21.)
Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to

64 characters
Login Password FTP server login password Up to

64 characters
*1 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the
slash "/" not using the back-slash.
NOTE
• Refer to the following for details on entering characters.
• Select [Menu] > [Connection Test] to check the connection to the FTP server you chose.
If the connection fails, check the entries you made.
• When [SSL] is enabled in [Security Settings], you can select [Menu] > [Connection Test
(Encrypted TX)] to check the FTP encrypted transmission connection. If the connection
fails, check the entries you made.
1 To specify the Address Number, select [Address Number].
2 Use [+] / [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (001 to 120).
To have the number assigned automatically, enter "000".
NOTE
• Address Number is an ID for a destination. A free number can be selected.
• If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears.
3 Select [OK].
4 Check if the destination entry is correct > [Save]

The destination is added to the Address Book.
3-22
Registering a Group
Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a
group, a maximum of 20 groups can be added in the Address Book.
NOTE
To add a group, you need individually added destinations. Register one or more individual destinations as needed
before proceeding. Up to 100 individually registered destinations and a combined total of up to 5 SMB and FTP
destination folders can be registered in a single group.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book] > [ ]>
[Group]
2 Add the name.

Enter the group name to be displayed on the Address Book > [Next]
NOTE
3 Select the members (destinations).

1 Select [Member].
2 Select [ ].
3 Select destinations (contacts) to add to the group. The selected destinations are indicated
by a checkmark in the check box.
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
4 Select [OK].
If you have more destinations to add, repeat Steps 2 to 4.
5 Select [End].
6 To specify the Address Number, select [Address Number].
7 Use [+] / [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (001 to 120).
To have the number assigned automatically, enter "000".
NOTE
• Address Number is an ID for a destination. A free number can be selected.
• If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears.
8 Select [OK].
4 Check if the selected destination was added to the group >

[Save]
The group is added to the Address Book.
3-23
Editing Address Book Entries

Edit the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book]
2 Edit the destination.
NOTE
Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-34)
Editing a Contact
1 Select [ ] for the destination (contacts) to edit.
2 Change "Name", "Address Number" and destination type and address.

Registering a contact address (page 3-20)
3 After you have completed the changes, [Save] > [Yes]

Register the changed destination.
Editing a Group
1 Select [ ] for the group to edit.
2 Change "Name" and "Address Number".

Registering a Group (page 3-23)
3 Select [Member].
4 To delete any destination from the group, select the destination > [ ] > [Yes]
To add the destination, select [ ].
5 After you have completed the changes, [Save] > [Yes]

Register the changed group.
3-24
Deleting Address Book Entries

Delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.

1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book]
2 Select a destination or group to delete.
NOTE
2 [ ] > [Yes]
Delete the contact or group.
3-25
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch

Key)
Assign a new destination (contact or group) to an one touch key. A maximum of 100 destinations can be registered.
NOTE
• Refer to the following for use of One Touch Key.
• You can add One Touch keys and change their settings on Embedded Web Server RX.
Registering Destinations (page 2-62)

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [One Touch Key]
2 Add One Touch Keys.

1 Select a One Touch Key number (001 to 100) for the destination > [ ]
Selecting the [Quick No. Search] key enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.
2
System Menu/Counter. 10:10
Address Book/One Touch - One Touch Key
001 AAA 002 BBB 003 CCC
004 None 005 None

1 006 None
1/9
Menu End
2 Select a destination (contact or group) to add to the One Touch Key number > [Next]
Selecting [ ] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
NOTE
3 Enter the One Touch Key name displayed in the send base screen > [Next]
NOTE
4 Select [Save].
The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.
3-26
Editing One Touch Key

1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [One Touch Key]
2 Select a One Touch Key number (001 to 100) to edit. Selecting the [Quick No. Search] key
enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
2 Change the registered information.

1 [Menu] > [Edit] > [Destination]
2 Select a new destination (contact or group). Selecting [ ] shows the detailed information
of the selected destination.
10:10
Address Book (All)
001 ABCD 123456
002 EFGH efg@efg.com

1/2
003 IJKL 12345.com
004 MNOP 11111.com
Menu Cancel OK
NOTE
3 [OK] > [Save] > [Yes]

Add the destination to the One Touch Key.
3-27
Deleting One Touch Key

1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [One Touch Key]
2 Select a One Touch Key number (001 to 100) to edit. Selecting the [Quick No. Search] key
enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
2 Delete the registered information.

Select [ ] > [Yes]

Address Book/One Touch - One Touch Key
001 AAA 002 BBB 003 CCC
1/9
Menu End
Deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key.
3-28
4 Printing from PC
This chapter explains the following topics:
Printer Driver Properties Screen ........................................................................................................................ 4-2
Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................................................ 4-3
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) ................................................................... 4-3
Printing from PC ................................................................................................................................................. 4-4
Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................................................ 4-4
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper .................................................................................................... 4-6
Canceling Printing from a Computer ........................................................................................................ 4-9
Printing from the Handheld Device .................................................................................................................. 4-10
Printing by AirPrint ................................................................................................................................. 4-10
Printing by Google Cloud Print .............................................................................................................. 4-10
Printing by Mopria .................................................................................................................................. 4-10
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ....................................................................................................................... 4-10
Printing Data Saved in the Printer ..................................................................................................................... 4-11
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job ............................................................... 4-11
Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................................................ 4-12
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ........................................................................ 4-12
Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................................................ 4-13
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box .......................................................................... 4-13
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box .............................................................................................. 4-14
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box ......................................................................... 4-14
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box ......................................................................................... 4-15
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box ................................................................... 4-15
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ................................................................................................. 4-16
Accessing the Status Monitor ................................................................................................................ 4-16
Exiting the Status Monitor ...................................................................................................................... 4-16
Quick View State .................................................................................................................................... 4-16
Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................................................ 4-17
Paper Tray Status Tab ........................................................................................................................... 4-17
Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 4-17
Alert Tab ................................................................................................................................................. 4-18
Status Monitor Context Menu ................................................................................................................ 4-18
Status Monitor Notification Settings ....................................................................................................... 4-19
4-1
Printing from PC > Printer Driver Properties Screen
Printer Driver Properties Screen

The printer driver properties screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings.
1
3
No. Description
1 [Quick Print] tab
Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an icon, it
changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.
[Basic] tab
This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size and duplex
printing.
[Layout] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine mode,
poster printing, and scaling.
[Imaging] tab
This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.
[Publishing] tab
This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film.
[Job] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly used
documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved documents can
be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that
you don't want others to see.
[Advanced] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.
2 [Profiles]
Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's a
convenient practice to save frequently used settings.
3 [Reset]
Click to revert settings to their initial values.
4-2
Printing from PC > Printer Driver Properties Screen
Displaying the Printer Driver Help

The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display
Help as explained below.
1 1 Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of the

screen.
2 Click the item you want to know about.
NOTE
The Help appears, even when you click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings

(Windows 8.1)
The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when
printing. For the settings, refer to the following:
1 In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and

then [Devices and Printers].
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the
[Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.
3 Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.
4 Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.
4-3
Printing from PC > Printing from PC
Printing from PC
This section provides the printing method using the Printing System Driver.
NOTE
• To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied DVD
(Product Library).
• In some environments, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the printer driver.
• When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes in the multipurpose tray before
performing the following procedure.
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-5)
Printing on Standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is included in the print sizes of the machine, select the paper size in the [Basic] tab of the
print settings screen of the printer driver.
NOTE
Specify the paper size and media type to print from the operation panel.
Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-8)

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

1 Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.
1 2
4-4
2 Select the [Basic] tab.
3 Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.
To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock or
envelopes, the paper size needs to be registered.
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select
the media type.
4 Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
3 Start printing.
Click the [OK] button.
4-5
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is not included in the print sizes of the machine, register the paper size in the [Basic] tab
of the print settings screen of the printer driver.
The registered size can be selected from the "Print size" menu.
NOTE
To execute printing at the machine, set the paper size and type in the following:
Paper Settings (page 8-13)

1 In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and then [Devices and Printers].
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and
Printers].
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of
the printer driver.
3 Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.
2 Register the paper size.

1 Click the [Basic] tab.
1
2
2 Click the [Page Size...] button.

3 Click the [New] button.
3
4
5
6
7
4 Enter the paper size.
5 Enter the name of the paper.
4-6
6 Click the [Save] button.

7 Click the [OK] button.
8 Click the [OK] button.
3 Display the print settings screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
4 Select the paper size and type of non-standard size paper.

1 Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.
1 2
2 Select the [Basic] tab.
4-7
3 Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 2.
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select
the media type.
NOTE
If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Cardstock] or [Envelope] in the "Media
type" menu.
4 Select the paper source in the "Source" menu.
5 Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
5 Start printing.
Click the [OK] button.
4-8
Canceling Printing from a Computer

To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:
NOTE
When canceling printing from this machine, refer to the following:
Canceling Jobs (page 5-16)
1 Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on the taskbar at

the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog
box for the printer.
2 Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select
[Cancel] from the "Document" menu.
4-9
Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device
Printing from the Handheld Device

This machine supports the AirPrint, Google Cloud Print, Mopria and Wi-Fi Direct.
According to the supported OS and application, you can print the job from any handheld device or computer without
installing a printer driver.
Printing by AirPrint
AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later
products.
To use the AirPrint, make sure that the AirPrint setting is enabled in the Embedded Web Server RX.
Printing by Google Cloud Print

Google Cloud Print is a printing service provided by Google. This service enables a user with a Google account to print
from a machine connected to the Internet.
The machine can be configured in the Embedded Web Server RX.
NOTE
A Google account is necessary to use Google Cloud Print. Obtain a Google account if you do not have one.
It is also necessary to register the machine with the Google Cloud Print service in advance. The machine can be
registered from a PC connected to the same network.
Printing by Mopria
Mopria is a standard on printing function included in Android 4.4 or later products. Mopria Print Service needs to be
installed and enabled in advance.
For details on how to use, refer to a Web site of Mopria Alliance.
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct is a wireless LAN standard that Wi-Fi Alliance has been established. This is one of the functions of the
wireless LAN, without a wireless LAN access point or wireless LAN router, between devices can communicate directly
on a peer to peer basis.
The printing procedure by the Wi-Fi Direct is the same as that from the normal handheld devices.
When you use a printer name or Bonjour name on the port settings of the printer property, you can print the job by
specifying the name at Wi-Fi Direct connection.
When you use an IP address for the port, specify the IP address of this machine.
4-10
Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Data Saved in the Printer

You can save the print job into the Job Box of this device and print it as necessary.
To use the Stored Job Box and the Quick Copy Box, an SD/SDHC memory card must be installed in the device.
To use the Private Print Box and the Proof and Hold Box, an expansion memory or SD/SDHC memory card must be
installed in the device.
IMPORTANT
Unencrypted data is saved on the SD/SDHC memory card.
Exercise caution when saving sensitive documents.
NOTE
• To use expansion memory, [RAM Disk Setting] must be [On].
RAM Disk Setting (page 8-37)
• If you are using an SD/SDHC memory card to use a job box, set [RAM Disk Setting] to [Off].
If you configure settings in the [Job] tab of the printer driver and then print, the print job will be saved in the Job Box
(memory) and printing can be executed at the machine.
Follow the work flow below when using Job Box.
Specifying the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job. (page 4-11)
Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it.
You can print the documents from the following boxes.
Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 4-12)
Printing Document from Stored Job Box (page 4-13)
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box (page 4-14)
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box (page 4-15)
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing

the Job
1 Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
The Print dialog box displays.
2 Select the machine from the "Name" menu.
3 Click the [Properties] button.

The Properties dialog box displays.
4 Click the [Job] tab and select the [Job storage (e-MPS)] check
box to set the function.
NOTE
For information on how to use the printer driver software, refer to the following:
4-11
Printing Documents from Private Print Box

In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job
from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by
entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. The data will be deleted upon
completion of the print job or after the power switch is turned off.

1 [Home] key > [Job Box]
2 Select [Private Print/Stored Job].
3 Select the creator of the document.
2 Print the document.

1 Select the document to print > [Print]
2 Enter the access code.
3 Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
4 Select [OK].
Printing starts.
Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print

Box

2 Delete the document.

Select the document to delete > [ ] > Enter the access code
Document Box. 10:10

Job Box - Private Print/Stored Job 2
doc4100908135138 2014/10/10 10:10
doc0100908134821 2014/10/10 11:11

1/1
1
Menu < Back Print
The document is deleted.
4-12
Printing Document from Stored Job Box

In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up an access code as
necessary. If you set up an access code, enter the access code when printing. Print data will be stored in the Stored Job
Box after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.


NOTE
If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be
displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.
3 Select [OK].
Printing starts.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box


1 Select the document to delete > [ ]
Document Box. 10:10

Job Box - Private Print/Stored Job 2
doc4100908135138 2014/10/10 10:10
doc0100908134821 2014/10/10 11:11

1/1
1
Menu < Back Print
2 Select [Yes].
NOTE
If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be
displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.
4-13
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box

Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a
document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional copies
are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the touch panel. By default, up to 32 documents can be
stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
NOTE
• When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one.
• To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-22)

2 Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].

3 Select [OK].
Printing starts.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box


Document Box. 10:10

Job Box - Quick Copy/Proof and Hold 2
doc4100908135138 2014/10/10 10:10
doc0100908134821 2014/10/10 11:11

1/1
1
Menu Cancel < Back Print
2 Select [Yes].
4-14
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box

The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining
copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while
maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the touch panel. You can
change the number of copies to print.


3 Select [OK].
Printing starts.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold

Box


Document Box. 10:10

Job Box - Quick Copy/Proof and Hold 2
doc4100908135138 2014/10/10 10:10
doc0100908134821 2014/10/10 11:11

1/1
1
Menu Cancel < Back Print
2 Select [Yes].
4-15
Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status

Monitor)
The Status Monitor monitors the machine status and provides an ongoing reporting function.
NOTE
When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below.
• Printing System Driver is installed.
• Either [Enhanced WSD] or [Enhanced WSD over SSL] is enabled.
Network (page 8-26)
Accessing the Status Monitor

The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started.
Exiting the Status Monitor

Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor.
• Exit manually:
Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor.
• Exit automatically:
The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 7 minutes if it is not being used.
Quick View State

The status of the machine is displayed using icons. Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is clicked.
1 Printing Progress Tab

2 Paper Tray Status Tab
3 Toner Status Tab
4 Alert Tab
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 Expand button
6 Settings icon
Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.
4-16
Printing Progress Tab

The status of the print jobs is displayed.
1 Status icon
2 Job list
1
Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right-click.
Paper Tray Status Tab

Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the amount of paper remaining.
Toner Status Tab

The amount of toner remaining is displayed.
4-17
Alert Tab
If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.
Status Monitor Context Menu

The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked.
• Embedded Web Server RX

If the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network and has its own IP address, use a web browser to access the
Embedded Web Server RX to modify or confirm the network settings.This menu is not displayed when using USB
connection.
• Notification…
This sets the display of the Status Monitor.
Status Monitor Notification Settings (page 4-19)
• Exit
Exits the Status Monitor.
4-18
Status Monitor Notification Settings

Click the setting icon to display valid events in the status monitor notification screen.
Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.
1 Select Enable event notification.

If this setting is set to Off, then the Status Monitor will not start up even when printing is
executed.
2 Select an event to use with the text to speech function in

Available events.
3 Click Sound file / Text to Speech column.

Click the browse (...) button to notify the event by sound file.
NOTE
The available file format is WAV.
When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud, enter the texts in the text
box.
4-19
5 Operation on the Machine
Loading Originals .......................................... 5-2 Scanning with File Management Utility ....... 5-29
Placing Originals on the Platen ........... 5-2 Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-29
Loading Originals in the Document Recalling a Favorite Configured
Processor ............................................ 5-3 in FMU .............................................. 5-29
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ....... 5-5 Sending to Different Types of Destinations
Favorites ....................................................... 5-8 (Multi Sending) ............................................ 5-30
Registering Favorite Using the Wizard Send to Me (E-mail) .................................... 5-31
Mode ................................................... 5-9 Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-31
Registering Favorite Using the Program Sending a document to the mail address
Mode ................................................. 5-10 of the logged in user ......................... 5-31
Recalling Favorite using the Wizard Canceling Sending Jobs ............................. 5-32
Mode .................................................. 5-11 Handling Destination ................................... 5-33
Recalling Favorite using the Program Specifying Destination ...................... 5-33
Mode ................................................. 5-12 Choosing from the Address Book ..... 5-34
Editing Favorite ................................. 5-12 Choosing from the External Address
Deleting Favorite ............................... 5-12 Book .................................................. 5-36
Registering Shortcuts .................................. 5-13 Choosing from the One Touch Key ... 5-37
Adding Shortcuts ............................... 5-13 Checking and Editing Destinations ... 5-37
Editing Shortcuts ............................... 5-14 Confirmation Screen of Destinations .... 5-38
Deleting Shortcuts ............................. 5-14 Recall ................................................ 5-38
Copying ....................................................... 5-15 How to use the FAX Function ..................... 5-39
Basic Operation ................................ 5-15 Using Document Boxes .............................. 5-40
Canceling Jobs ................................. 5-16 What is Job Box? .............................. 5-40
Frequently-Used Sending Method .............. 5-17 What is Removable Memory Box? .... 5-40
Sending Document via E-mail ..................... 5-18 Sub Address Box/Polling Box ........... 5-40
Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-18 Operating using Removable USB Memory ...... 5-41
Sending Scanned Document via Printing Documents Stored
E-mail ................................................ 5-18 in Removable USB Memory ............. 5-41
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder Saving Documents to USB Memory
on a Computer (Scan to PC) ....................... 5-20 (Scan to USB) ................................... 5-43
Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-20 Check the USB Memory Information .... 5-44
Sending Document to Desired Shared Removing USB Memory ................... 5-44
Folder on a Computer ....................... 5-20
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server
(Scan to FTP) .............................................. 5-23
Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-23
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP
Server ............................................... 5-23
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ................... 5-25
Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-25
Scanning Document Using
Application ........................................ 5-25
Useful Sending Method ............................... 5-26
WSD Scan .................................................. 5-27
Installing Driver Software .................. 5-27
WSD scan ......................................... 5-28
5-1
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
Loading Originals
Load the originals on the platen or document processor, depending on the original size, type, volume, and function.
• Platen: Place the sheet, book, postcards, and envelopes.
• Document Processor: Place the multiple originals. You can also place the two sided originals.
Placing Originals on the Platen

You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
1 Put the scanning side facedown.

2
2 Align it flush against the original
size indicator plates with the back
left corner as the reference point.
1
NOTE
For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:
When you place envelopes or cardstock on the platen

1 Put the scanning side facedown.
2 2 Align it flush against the original

size indicator plates with the back
left corner as the reference point.
NOTE
For the procedure for feeding envelopes or cardstock, refer to the following:
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray (page 5-7)
CAUTION
Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.
IMPORTANT
• Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen
glass.
• When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document processor in the open
position.
5-2
Loading Originals in the Document Processor

The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are
scanned.
The document processor supports the following types of originals.
Weight 50 to 160 g/m2

(duplex: 50 to 160 g/m2)
Sizes Maximum A4 (Legal) to Minimum A6 (Statement)
No. of sheets Plain paper (80 g/m2): 50 sheets or less (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)
Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Otherwise, the originals may be jammed or the
document processor may become dirty.
• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before
loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)
• Originals with adhesive tape or glue
• Originals with cut-out sections
• Curled original
• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)
• Carbon paper
• Crumpled paper
IMPORTANT
• Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on
the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
• Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover, such as aligning the originals on the top
cover. It may cause an error in the document processor.
1 Open the original table and then adjust the original width
guides.
5-3
2 Place the originals.

1 Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the
leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go.
NOTE
For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:
IMPORTANT
Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap,
readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.
Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the
maximum level may cause the originals to jam.
Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way
that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).
2 Open the original stopper to fit the size of the original set (Original size: Legal).
5-4
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following:
Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 11-12)
For the paper type setting, refer to the following:
Media Type Setting (page 8-15)
Be sure to use the multipurpose tray when you print on any special paper.
IMPORTANT
• If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the
paper you are using.
• Remove each transparency from the inner tray as it is printed. Leaving transparencies in the inner tray may
cause a paper jam.
The capacity of the multipurpose tray is as follows.

• Plain paper (80 g/m2) or recycled paper: 50 sheets
• Thick paper (209 g/m2): 15 sheets
• Thick paper (157 g/m2): 30 sheets
• Thick paper (104.7 g/m2): 50 sheets
• Hagaki (Cardstock): 15 sheets
• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2:
5 sheets
• OHP film: 1 sheet
• Coated: 30 sheets
NOTE
• When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to the following:
Paper Settings (page 8-13)
• When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to the
following:
1 Open the multipurpose tray.
5-5
2 Adjust the multipurpose tray size.

Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.
3 Load paper.
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.
After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the
multipurpose tray.
IMPORTANT
• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing up.
• Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
• When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left
over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small
amount of paper left over in the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first
remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before
loading the paper back into the tray.
• If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides
to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.
4 Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using

the operation panel.
5-6
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray

Load the paper with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:
Example: When printing the address.
1 Oufuku hagaki (Return

postcard)
2 Hagaki (Cardstocks)
3 Portrait form envelopes
4 Landscape form envelopes
1 2 3 4
IMPORTANT
• Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard).
• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to
load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE
When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following:
5-7
Operation on the Machine > Favorites
Favorites
Frequently used functions can be registered as favorites so that they can be called up easily.
The following functions are pre-registered on this machine. You can delete these functions as well as register new
functions.
Favorites Name Description Default Registration

ID Card Copy Use this when you want to copy a driver's license • Copying Functions
or an insurance card. • Program mode
When you scan the front and back of the card,
• Combine: [2 in 1]
both sides will be combined and copied onto a
Color Selection: [Black & White]
single sheet.
Continuous Scan: [On]
Original Size: [A5/Statement]
Paper Selection: Cassette 1
Zoom: [Auto Zoom]
Paper Saving Copy Use this when you want to reduce paper use. • Copying Functions
Page combining and two-sided copying can be • Wizard mode
set by following the screen.
• Combine: [2 in 1]
2-sided/Original: [1-sided]
Duplex: [1-sided>>2-sided]
Paper Selection: Cassette 1
Copies: 1
Scan to PC (Address Use this when you want to send the image to • Sending Functions
Entry) either a shared folder on a PC or an FTP server • Wizard mode
folder. The settings such as the destination and
color selection can be set by following the screen. • Destination: New PC Folder
Color Selection: [Full Color]
File Name Entry: Default
File Format: [PDF]
Continuous Scan: [Off]
Scan Resolution: [300×300 dpi]
Scan to PC (Address Use this when you want to send the image to • Sending Functions
Book) either a shared folder on a PC registered in the • Wizard mode
Address Book or to an FTP server folder. The
settings such as the destination and color • Destination: Address Book
selection can be set by following the screen. Color Selection: [Full Color]
File Format: [PDF]
Scan to E-mail (Address Use this when you want to send the image to an • Sending Functions
Entry) E-mail address. The settings such as the • Wizard mode
destination and color selection can be set by
following the screen. • Destination: New E-mail Address
File Format: [PDF]
E-mail subject: Default
E-mail body: Default
5-8
Favorites Name Description Default Registration

Scan to E-mail (Address Use this when you want to send the image to an • Sending Functions
Book) E-mail address registered in the Address Book. • Wizard mode
The settings such as the destination and color
selection can be set by following the screen. • Destination: Address Book
File Format: [PDF]
E-mail subject: Default
E-mail body: Default
NOTE
Up to 20 settings can be registered as favorites.
When registering a favorite, you can choose from two methods for calling it up:
• Wizard mode: Registered settings are called up in order and configured as you check or change each one.
• Program mode: Settings are called up immediately when you select the key to which they are registered.
Registering Favorite Using the Wizard Mode

[Home] key > [Task Screen] > [Favorites]
2 Register the favorite.

1 [Menu] > [Add]
2 Select the job type.
3 Select [Wizard].
4 Select the recall function > [Next]
NOTE
When the job type is "Copy", the Destination Recall Method screen will not be displayed.
5 Enter the new favorite name > [Next]

5-9
6 Check the settings and change or add information as needed.
Item Description
Name Enter the name displayed on the favorite screen (up to 32 characters).
Job Type The type of the selected job is displayed.
Number*1 Enter the favorite number.

If you enter 00, the smallest number available will be automatically
assigned.
Destination*2 Selects the Destination Recall Method.
Functions Selects the functions to be displayed in the wizard.
Function Type Selects the method for recalling favorites.
*1 If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
*2 Displayed when the job type is [Send] or [FAX].
7 Select [Save].
The favorite is registered.
8 "Do you want to add a new function to the home screen?" screen appears.To display a
registered favorite on the Home screen, select [Yes] and specify the position in which you
want to display the icon of registered favorite, and select [Save].
Registering Favorite Using the Program Mode

When registering favorites in program mode, configure the copy function, send function, fax function, destination, or
other setting to register.
Sending is explained as an example below.

1 [Home] key > [Send]
2 Select the sending functions and destinations that you want to register in the program.
3 Select [Favorites].
2 Register the favorite.

1 [Menu] > [Add]
2 Select the job type.
3 Select [Program].
4 Enter the new favorite name > [Next]

5-10
Item Description
Name Enter the name displayed on the favorite screen (up to 32 characters).
Number*1 Enter the favorite number.

If you enter 00, the smallest number available will be automatically
assigned.
Job Type The type of the selected job is displayed.
Function Type Selects the method for recalling favorites.
*1 If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
6 Select [Save].
The favorite is registered.
7 "Do you want to add a new function to the home screen?" screen appears. To display a
registered favorite on the Home screen, select [Yes] and specify the position in which you
want to display the icon of registered favorite, and select [Save].
Recalling Favorite using the Wizard Mode

Select [Favorites] registered in the home screen, or select the icon that appears in
[Task Screen] > [Favorites].
2 Execute the favorite.

1 The registered screens are displayed in order. Make the desired settings and select [Next].
When all the settings are complete, the confirmation screen is displayed.
NOTE
To edit the settings, select [<Back] and make changes as desired.
2 Place the originals > [Start] key
5-11
Recalling Favorite using the Program Mode

2 Execute the favorite.

Place the originals > [Start] key
Editing Favorite
You can change favorite number and favorite name.

2 Edit the favorite.

1 [Menu] > [Edit]
2 Select the favorite you wish to edit.
3 Change the favorite number and favorite name.
When registering a favorite, you can choose from two methods for calling it up: (page
5-9)
4 [Save] > [Yes]
Deleting Favorite

2 Delete the favorite.

1 [Menu] > [Delete]
2 Select the favorite you wish to delete.
3 Select [Yes].
5-12
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts
Registering Shortcuts
You can register shortcuts for easy access to the frequently used functions. The settings for the selected function can
also be registered. A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be changed as necessary.
Adding Shortcuts
Shortcut registration is performed in the "Functions" screen of each function.

In the Copy, Send, Document Box, or FAX screen, select as follows.
[Functions] > [Add/Edit Shortcut]
NOTE
When user control is set to local authentication and the user logs in with user rights, [Add/
Edit Shortcut] does not appear.
2 Register the shortcuts.

1 Select [Add].
2 Select the key to which you wish to register the shared shortcut.
NOTE
If you select a shortcut number already registered, the currently registered shortcut can
be replaced with a new one.
3 Select the function screen to display with the shortcut.
4 Enter the shortcut name > [Next]
NOTE
5 Select [Save].
The shortcut is registered.
5-13
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts
Editing Shortcuts
1 In the "Functions" screen of each function, select [Add/Edit

Shortcut] in the bottom of the screen.
2 Edit the shortcut.

1 Select [Edit].
2 Select the shortcut type and number you wish to edit.
3 Select [Number] or [Name].
4 Change the settings > [OK]
5 [Save] > [Yes]
Deleting Shortcuts
1 In the "Functions" screen of each function, select [Add/Edit

Shortcut] in the bottom of the screen.
2 Delete the shortcut.

1 Select [Delete].
2 Select the shortcut you wish to delete.
3 Select [Yes].
5-14
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Copying
The procedures here represent the basic copy operation and how to cancel the copy.
Basic Operation
1 [Home] key > [Copy]
Loading Originals (page 5-2)
3 Select the functions.

To configure the settings for functions, select the function key. By selecting [Functions], other
selectable functions will be shown as a list.
About Functions Available on the Machine (page 6-2)
4 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.

Specify the desired number up to 999.
5 Press the [Start] key.

Copying begins.
5-15
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Canceling Jobs
1 Select the [Stop] key with the copy screen displayed.
2 Cancel a job.
When there is a job is being scanned

The copy job is canceled.
When there is a job printing or on standby

Canceling job screen appears. The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
Select the job you wish to cancel > [Delete] > [Yes]
5-16
Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method
Frequently-Used Sending Method

This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In
order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.
A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send E-mail. It is
recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.
Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.
• Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry): Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
Sending Document via E-mail (page 5-18)
• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC.
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 5-20)
• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 5-23)
• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program.
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA (page 5-25)
NOTE
• Different sending options can be specified in combination.
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-30)
• The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.
FAX Operation Guide
5-17
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail
Sending Document via E-mail

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Primary Network (Client) (page 8-36)
Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending an E-mail, configure the SMTP and E-mail settings using the Embedded Web Server RX.
E-mail Settings (page 2-58)
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail
3 In the basic screen for sending, select [E-mail].
4 Enter destination E-mail address > [OK]

To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination. Up to
100 E-mail addresses can be specified.
You can register the entered E-mail address in the Address Book by selecting [Menu] > [Add to
Address Book]. You can also replace the information for a previously registered destination.
Destinations can be changed later.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-38)
5 Select the color mode setting.

5-18
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail

Select [Functions] to display other functions.
Send (page 6-4)

Sending starts.
5-19
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
Sending Document to Desired Shared

Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
Before sending an document, configure the following settings.
• Make a note of the computer name and full computer name
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name (page 3-10)
• Make a note of the user name and domain name
Making a note of the user name and domain name (page 3-11)
• Create a shared folder and make a note of a shared folder
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder (page 3-12)
• Configure the Windows firewall
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a

Computer
3 In the basic screen for sending, select [Folder].
4 Select [SMB] from the folder type.
5-20
5 Select the folder specification method.

To search for a folder on a PC on the network, select [Search Folder from Network] or
[Search Folder by Host Name].
If you selected [Search Folder from Network], you can search all PCs on the network for a
destination.
If you selected [Search Folder by Host Name], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup", and
"Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.
Up to 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to
specify in the screen that appears, and select [Next]. The login user name and login password
entry screen appears.
After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the
shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [Next]. The
address of the selected shared folder is set.
Select the folder from the Search Results list.

Enter the next information. Once you have entered one item, select [Next] to advance to the
next item.
The table below lists the items to be set.
Item Detail Max.

characters
Host Name*1 Computer name Up to
64 characters
Path Share name Up to

For example: scannerdata 128 characters
If saving in a folder in the shared folder:
share name\folder name in shared folder
Login User Name If the computer name and domain name are the same: Up to
User Name 64 characters
For example: james.smith
If the computer name and domain name are different:
Domain name\User name
For example: abcdnet\james.smith
Login Password Windows logon password Up to

*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:445)
If the port number is not specified, the default port number is 445.
5-21
7 Check the status.

1 Check the information.
Change the delay as required.
2 Check the connection.

[Menu] > [Connection Test]
"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot
connect." appears, review the entry.
To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.
You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add to Address Book].
8 Select [OK].

Send (page 6-4)

Sending starts.
5-22
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP

Server (Scan to FTP)
Before sending an document, configure the FTP Client (Transmission).
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server
3 In the basic screen for sending, select [Folder].
4 Select [FTP] from the folder type.
5-23
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)

Enter the next information. Once you have entered one item, select [Next] to advance to the
next item.
The table below lists the items to be set.
Item Data to be entered Max.

characters
Host Name*1 Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to
64 characters
Path*2 Path to the receiving folder Up to

For example: User\ScanData 128 characters
Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory.
Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to

64 characters
Login Password FTP server login password Up to

*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:21)
If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 21.
*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the
slash "/" not using the back-slash.
6 Check the status.

Change the delay as required.
2 Check the connection.

[Menu] > [Connection Test]
"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot
connect." appears, review the entry.
To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.
You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add to Address Book].
7 Select [OK].

Send (page 6-4)

Sending starts.
5-24
Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN or WIA
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA

Before sending an document, confirm that TWAIN/WIA driver is installed on a computer and the settings are configured.
Setting WIA Driver (page 2-49)
Scanning Document Using Application

This subsection explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The WIA driver is used in the same way.

1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.
2 Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.
NOTE
For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application
software.
2 Configure the scan settings.

Select scanning settings in the dialog box that opens.
NOTE
For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.
4 Scan the originals.

Click the [Scan] button. The document data is scanned.
5-25
Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method
Useful Sending Method

You can specify the following useful scanning (sending) methods.
• WSD Scan: Saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
• Scanning with File Management Utility:Scans a document using the settings of File Management Utility and saves it
to a specified network folder or PC.
Scanning with File Management Utility (page 5-29)
• Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending): Sends to different types of destination (E-mail addresses,
folders, etc.) in a single operation.
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-30)
• Send to Me (E-mail): Sends to the E-mail address of the logged in user when user login is enabled.
Send to Me (E-mail) (page 5-31)
5-26
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
WSD Scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
NOTE
• To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-connected, and
"WSD Scan" is set to [On] in the network settings.
• For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your software.
Installing Driver Software

In Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Microsoft Windows Server 2012
1 Click [Search] in charms, [Control Panel], and then [View

devices and printers].
2 Install the driver.

Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].
When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the
installation is completed.
In Windows 7
1 Display [Network] in the Start menu.

Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Network].
NOTE
When [Network] does not appear in the Start menu, perform the following procedure.
1 Right-click [Start] and click [Property] in the menu that appears.
2 Select the [[Start] menu] tab in the "Task bar and [Start] menu properties" screen, and
click [Customize].
3 When the "Customize [Start] menu" screen appears, select the "Network" check box
and click [OK].

Right-click the machine's icon and then click [Install].
NOTE
If the "User Account Control" window appears, click [Continue].
If the "Found New Hardware" window appears, click [Cancel].
During the installation, double-click the icon shown on the task bar to display the "Driver
Software Installation" screen. When "Your devices are ready to use" is displayed on the
[Driver Software Installation] screen, the installation is completed.
5-27
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
In Windows 10
1 Right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Control

Panel] and then [View devices and printer].

Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].
When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the
installation is completed.
WSD scan

Select [WSD Scan].
4 Scan the originals.

Procedure using this machine
1 Select [From Operation Panel].
2 Select the destination computer > [OK]

Select [Reload] to reload the computer list.
You can view information on the selected computer by selecting [ ].

Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.
Procedure from Your Computer
1 [From Computer] > [OK]
2 Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.
5-28
Operation on the Machine > Scanning with File Management Utility
Scanning with File Management Utility

File Management Utility is an application that sends a scanned document to a specified network folder or PC. You can
create a work flow with FMU for processing of the scanned document, and register the workflow in the machine as a
favorite.

To use this function, you must install File Management Utility on your computer and configure settings for the
multifunction machine to be used, scanning conditions, and the file save location. To install File Management Utility, refer
to the following.
Installing Software (page 2-37)
NOTE
For information on using File Management Utility, refer to the following:
File Management Utility User Guide
Recalling a Favorite Configured in FMU
1 Make sure that File Management Utility is running on the

computer (or server) on which File Management Utility is
installed.
2 Place the original.
3 Recall a favorite.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the necessary

information and select [Next].
5 When the scan settings screen appears, select each item and
configure the necessary settings.
The features that can be set depend on File Management Utility.

Sending starts.
5-29
Operation on the Machine > Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)
Sending to Different Types of Destinations

(Multi Sending)
You can specify destinations that combine E-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers. This is referred to
as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single
operation.
No. of broadcast items: Up to 100

However, number of items are restricted for the following sending options.
Folders (SMP, FTP): Total of 5 SMB and FTP
Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or
folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the [Start] key to start transmission to all destinations at one
time.
NOTE
If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.
5-30
Operation on the Machine > Send to Me (E-mail)
Send to Me (E-mail)
When user login is enabled, the document is sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.
NOTE
• To use this function, user control must be set to network authentication and the e-mail address of the user must be
registered in the network authentication server.
• For the procedure for setting an e-mail address, check with the administrator for network authentication server
users.

• To use this function, the function icon must be displayed in the home screen.
Sending a document to the mail address of the logged

in user
1 Select [Home] key.
2 Select [Send to Me (E-mail)] .
NOTE
If the e-mail address is not registered in the network authentication server, e-mail cannot be sent.
5-31
Operation on the Machine > Canceling Sending Jobs
Canceling Sending Jobs

1 Select the [Stop] key with the send screen displayed.
2 Cancel a job.
When there is a job is being scanned

Job Cancel appears.
When there is a job sending or on standby

Canceling job screen appears.
Select the job you wish to cancel > [Delete] > [Yes]
NOTE
Selecting the [Stop] key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.
5-32
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Handling Destination
This section explains how to select and confirm the destination.
Specifying Destination
Select the destination using either of the following methods except entering address directly:
• Choosing from the Address Book
• Choosing from the External Address Book
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
• Choosing from One Touch key.
Choosing from the One Touch Key (page 5-37)
• Choosing from the FAX
FAX Operation Guide
NOTE
• You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you select the [Send] key.
Default Screen (page 8-21)
• You can specify the fax destination. Enter the other party number using the numeric keypad.
5-33
Choosing from the Address Book

For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to the following:
Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-20)
1 In the basic screen for sending, select [Address Book].
NOTE
2 Select the destinations.

Select the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. The selected destinations
are indicated by a checkmark in the check box.
You can also select [Menu] to perform a more detailed search.
NOTE
To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
Destination Search
Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched.
10:10
1 Address Book (All)

3
001 ABCD 123456
002 EFGH efg@efg.com

1/2
003 IJKL 12345.com
004 MNOP 11111.com
2 Menu Cancel < Back OK
Keys used Search type Subjects searched

1 Advanced search by Advanced search by type of registered
destination destination (Email, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX or
Group).
2 Narrow Down Advanced search by Advanced search by type of registered

destination destination (Email, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX or
Group).
Search (Name) Search by name Search by registered name.
Search (No.) Search by number Search by registered address number.
Sort (Name) Change of display Sorts the list by destination name.

order
Sort (No.) Sorts the list by destination address number.
3 Search by name Search by registered name.
NOTE
You can specify a destination by address number by selecting the [Quick No. Search] key.
5-34
3 Accept the destination > [OK]

NOTE
You can set the default "Sort" settings.
Sort (page 8-23)
5-35
Choosing from the External Address Book
NOTE
1 In the basic screen for sending, select [External Address

Book].
2 Select the destinations.

Select the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. The selected destinations
are indicated by a checkmark in the check box.
You can also select [Menu] to perform a more detailed search.
NOTE
To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
3 Accept the destination > [OK]

NOTE
You can set the default "Sort" settings.
Sort (page 8-23)
5-36
Choosing from the One Touch Key

NOTE
This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered.
For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to the following:
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-26)
1 In the basic screen for sending, select [One Touch Key].
2 Select the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered.

If the One Touch Keys for the desired destination is hidden on the touch panel, select [ ] or
[ ] to scroll and view next or previous One Touch Keys.
NOTE
You can specify a One Touch Key by one touch number by selecting the [Quick No.
Search] key.
3 Select [OK].
Checking and Editing Destinations

1 Specify the destination.
2 Select [Check].
2 Check and edit the destination.

To add a new destination, select [ ].
To display details for the destinations, select [ ]. New E-mail addresses and PC folders can
be edited if they have been specified.
To delete the selected destination, select [ ].
NOTE
• When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New Destination, the confirmation screen
appears. Enter the same host name and path again, and select [OK].
Entry Check for New Dest. (page 8-21)
• When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen appears
after pressing the [Start] key.
Dest. Check before Send (page 8-21)
5-37
Confirmation Screen of Destinations

When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing
the [Start] key.
Dest. Check before Send (page 8-21)
Check the destinations and press [Check]. 10:10

Destinations Check
A OFFICE 1234567890
B OFFICE 2345678901
1/2
C OFFICE 3456789012
D OFFICE 4567890123
Menu Cancel Check
1 Select [ ] or [ ] to confirm all destination.

Selecting [ ] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete > [ ] > [Yes]
To add the destination, select [Cancel] and then return to the destination screen.
2 Select [Check].
NOTE
Be sure to confirm all destination by displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot select
[Check] unless you have confirmed all destination.
Recall
Recall is a function allowing you to send the last entered destination once again. When you want to send the image to
the same destination, select [Recall], and you can call the destination you sent on the destination list.
1 Select [Recall].
The destination you sent is displayed on the destination list.
NOTE
When the last sending included FAX, folders and E-mail destinations, they are also
displayed. If necessary, add or delete the destination.

Sending starts.
NOTE
• When [On] is selected in "Dest. Check before Send", a destination confirmation screen is
displayed when you press the [Start] key.
• Recall information is canceled in the following conditions.
- When you turn the power off
- When you send a next image (new recall information is registered)
- When you log out
5-38
Operation on the Machine > How to use the FAX Function
How to use the FAX Function

FAX function can be used with the machine.
FAX Operation Guide
5-39
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Using Document Boxes

The available Document Boxes are as follows: Job Box, Removable Memory Box, Sub address Box, and Polling Box.
What is Job Box?

Job Box is a generic name for the "Private Print/Stored Job Box", "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box". These Job Boxes
cannot be created or deleted by a user.
NOTE
• To use the Stored Job Box and the Quick Copy Box, an SD/SDHC memory card must be installed in the device.
• To use the Private Print Box and the Proof and Hold Box, an expansion memory or SD/SDHC memory card must be
installed in the device.
• You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted.
Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-22)
• For details on operating the Job Box, refer to the following:
Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-11)
IMPORTANT

What is Removable Memory Box?

A USB memory stick can be connected to the USB memory slot on the machine to print a saved file. You can print data
directly from the USB memory without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory
in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS or high compression PDF format (Scan to USB).
Sub Address Box/Polling Box

Sub Address Box/Polling Box store the fax data.
FAX Operation Guide
5-40
Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory
Operating using Removable USB Memory

Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB
memory without having to use a computer.
The following file types can be printed:
• PDF file (Version 1.7 or older)
• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)
• JPEG file
• XPS file
• OpenXPS file
• Encrypted PDF file
In addition, you can store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine.
The following file types can be stored:
• PDF file format
• TIFF file format
• JPEG file format
• XPS file format
• OpenXPS file format
• High-compression PDF file format
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB

Memory
NOTE
• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
• Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.
• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB Memory Slot.
1 Plug the USB memory.

1 Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.
5-41
2 When the machine reads the USB memory, "Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying
files. Are you sure?" may appear. Select [Yes].
Displays the removable memory screen.
NOTE
If the message does not appear, select [Removable Memory] on the Home screen.

1 Select the folder containing the file to be printed.
The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
NOTE
• 1,000 documents can be displayed.
• To return to a higher level folder, select [Back].
2 Select the file to be printed > [Print]
3 Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired.

For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-6)

Printing of the selected file begins.
5-42
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)
NOTE
The maximum number of the storable files is 1,000.
2 Plug the USB memory.

1 Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.
2 When the machine reads the USB memory, "Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying
files. Are you sure?" may appear. Select [Yes] to display the removable memory screen.
NOTE
If the message does not appear, select [Removable Memory] on the Home screen.
3 Store the document.

1 Select the folder where the file will be stored.
The machine will display the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
5-43
2 Select [ ].
Document Box. 10:10

Removable Memory
11-3-3.JPG
7-9-2.JPG
1/1
Menu < Back Print
3 Set the color mode, type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
For the features that can be set, refer to the following:
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-6)

The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory.
Check the USB Memory Information
1 In the removable memory screen, select [Menu] >

[Memory Information].
2 Once you confirm the information, select [End].
Removing USB Memory

IMPORTANT
Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.

Select [Removable Memory] on the Home screen.
2 [Menu] > [Remove Memory]

Select [OK], and remove the USB memory after "Removable Memory can be safely removed."
is displayed.
NOTE
USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device.
Device/Communication (page 7-11)
5-44
6 Using Various Functions
Functions Available on the Machine .................................................................................................................. 6-2
About Functions Available on the Machine .............................................................................................. 6-2
Copy ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-2
Send ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-4
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) ............................................................................. 6-6
Functions ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-8
Paper Selection ....................................................................................................................................... 6-9
Zoom ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-10
Density .................................................................................................................................................... 6-11
Duplex .................................................................................................................................................... 6-12
Combine ................................................................................................................................................ 6-14
Color Selection ...................................................................................................................................... 6-16
Collate .................................................................................................................................................... 6-16
Original Size .......................................................................................................................................... 6-17
Original Orientation ................................................................................................................................ 6-18
Mixed Size Originals .............................................................................................................................. 6-19
Original Image ....................................................................................................................................... 6-19
EcoPrint ................................................................................................................................................. 6-20
Hue Adjustment ..................................................................................................................................... 6-20
Color Balance ........................................................................................................................................ 6-21
Sharpness .............................................................................................................................................. 6-22
Contrast ................................................................................................................................................. 6-22
Background Density Adj. (Background Density Adjustment) ................................................................. 6-23
Skip Blank Page .................................................................................................................................... 6-23
Saturation .............................................................................................................................................. 6-24
Continuous Scan ................................................................................................................................... 6-24
Job Finish Notice ................................................................................................................................... 6-25
File Name Entry ..................................................................................................................................... 6-26
Priority Override ..................................................................................................................................... 6-26
File Format ............................................................................................................................................. 6-27
Duplex (2-sided Original) ....................................................................................................................... 6-30
Sending Size .......................................................................................................................................... 6-31
File Separation ....................................................................................................................................... 6-31
Scan Resolution ..................................................................................................................................... 6-32
E-mail Subject/Body .............................................................................................................................. 6-32
FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................................................. 6-33
Storing Size ............................................................................................................................................ 6-33
Encrypted PDF Password ...................................................................................................................... 6-34
JPEG/TIFF Print .................................................................................................................................... 6-34
XPS Fit to Page ..................................................................................................................................... 6-34
6-1
Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine
Functions Available on the Machine

About Functions Available on the Machine
This machine provides the various functions available.
Copy
To configure the settings for functions, select the function key. By selecting [Functions], other selectable functions will
be shown as a list.
Ready to copy. (Full Color) 10:10 Ready to copy. (Full Color) 10:10
Copy Copies Functions
Collate
Paper Zoom Density On
Selection Original Size
A4 100% Normal 0 A4
Function Original Orientation
1/5
key Duplex Combine Color Top Edge on Top

Selection Mixed Size Originals
1-sided>>1-sided Off Full Color Off
Functions Favorites Close Add/Edit

Shortcut
For details on each function, see the table below.
Reference
Function key Description
page
Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size. page 6-9
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-10
Density Adjust density. page 6-11
Duplex Produces two-sided prints. You can also create single-sided prints from two-sided page 6-12
originals.
Combine Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page. page 6-14
Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-16
Reference
Functions Description
page
Collate Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-16
Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-17
Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. page 6-18
Mixed Size Originals Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at page 6-19
once.
Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-19
EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-20
Hue Adjustment Adjust the color (hue) of images. page 6-20
Color Balance Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. page 6-21
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-22
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image. page 6-22
6-2
Reference
page
Background Density Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers. page 6-23
Adj.
Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank page 6-23
pages and prints only pages that are not blank.
Saturation Adjust the color saturation of the image. page 6-24
Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job. page 6-24
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-25
File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-26
Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. page 6-26
6-3
Send
To configure the settings for functions, select the function key. By selecting [Functions], other selectable functions will
be shown as a list.
Ready to send. (FullColor) 10:10 Ready to send. (FullColor) 10:10

Send Dest. : Functions
Check Color Selection
Recall
Black & White
File Format
PDF
One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book 1/7
Original Size
1/2
A4
E-mail Folder FAX Top Edge on Top
Functions Color Favorites Close Add/Edit

Shortcut
Reference
page
File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted. page 6-27
once.
Duplex Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original. page 6-30
Sending Size Select size of image to be sent. page 6-31
File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and sends page 6-31
the files.
Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-32
Adj.
FAX TX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. Refer to the FAX
Operation
Guide.
Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one page 6-24
job.
E-mail Subject/Body Adds subject and body when sending a document. page 6-32
6-4
Reference
page
FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. page 6-33
FAX Delayed Set a send time. Refer to the FAX

Transmission Operation
Guide.
FAX Direct Sends FAX directly without reading original data into memory. Refer to the FAX
Transmission Operation
Guide.
FAX Polling RX Dial the destination and receive documents for Polling Transmission stored in the Refer to the FAX
polling box. Operation
Guide.
FAX TX Report Print a report of FAX transmission results. Refer to the FAX
Operation
Guide.
6-5
Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents)

To configure the settings for functions, select the function key. By selecting [Functions], other selectable functions will be
shown as a list.
Ready to store in Box. (FullColor) 10:10 Ready to store in Box. (FullColor) 10:10
Store File Functions
Original Size
File Duplex Scan A4
Format Resolution Original Orientation
PDF 1-sided 300x300dpi Top Edge on Top
Function Mixed Size Originals
1/4
key Density File Name Color Off

Entry Selection Storing Size
Normal 0 doc Full Color Same as Original Size
Functions Cancel Close Add/Edit

Shortcut
Store File
Reference
page
File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted. page 6-27
Duplex Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original. page 6-30
Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-32
Reference
page
once.
Storing Size Select size of image to be stored. page 6-33
Adj.
Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job. page 6-24
File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and sends the page 6-31
files.
6-6
Printing Documents
Reference
page
Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size. page 6-9
Collate Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-16
Duplex Print a document on both sides of the paper. page 6-13
Reference
page
EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-20
Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. page 6-26
Encrypted PDF Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data. page 6-34
Password
JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files. page 6-34
XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing page 6-34
XPS file.
6-7
Using Various Functions > Functions
Functions
On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.
Print from
Printing: Copy
USB
Sending: Send
Scan to
Storing: USB
6-8
Paper Selection
Copy Print from

USB
Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size.
If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.
NOTE
• Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette.
• Cassette 2 is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
To select [MP tray], select [Paper Size] and [Media Type], and specify the paper size and the media type. The available
paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
Item Value Description

Paper Size Metric A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm Select from the Metric standard sizes.
Inch Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Statement, Executive, Select from the Inch series standard sizes.
Oficio II
Others 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Select from special standard sizes and custom
Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, sizes.
Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock),
Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2, Custom*1
Size Entry Metric Enter the size not included in the standard size.*2
X: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments) When you have selected [Size Entry], use [+]/[-]
Y: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments) or the numeric keys to set the sizes of "X"
(horizontal) and "Y" (vertical).
Inch
X: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
Media type Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (60 to 220 g/m2), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*3,
Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Envelope, Thick (106 to 220 g/m2), Coated,
High Quality, Custom 1 to 8*3
*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to the following:
Custom Paper Size (page 8-13)
*2 The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following:
Measurement (page 8-18)
*3 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to the following:
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:
NOTE
• You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default.
• If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multipurpose tray, a confirmation screen
appears. Load the required paper in the multipurpose tray and select [Continue] to start copying.
6-9
Zoom
Copy Send Scan to

USB
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
Copying
The following zoom options are available.
Auto
Adjusts the image to match the paper size.
A4: 141%
A5
A6: 70%
Standard Zoom
Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.
Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)
Metric Models 400% Max. 90% Folio>>A4 Inch Models 400% Max. 78% Legal>>Letter
200% 70% 200% 64% Letter>>Statement
141% A5 >> A4 50% 129% Statement>>Letter 50%
100% 25% Min. 100% 25% Min.
Others
Reduces or enlarges at magnifications other than the Standard Zoom.
Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)
Metric Models 115% B5 >> A4 78% Legal>>Letter Inch Models 141% A5 >> A4 86% A4 >> B5
86% A4 >> B5 64% Letter>>Statement 115% B5 >> A4 70% A4 >> A5
129% Statement>>Letter 90% Folio>>A4
Zoom Entry
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%. Use the numeric keys or
select [+] or [-] to enter the any magnification.
6-10
Sending/Storing
Item Description
100% Reproduces the original size.
Auto Reduces or enlarges original to sending/storing size.
NOTE
To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size, sending size, or storing size.
Sending Size (page 6-31)
Storing Size (page 6-33)
Density
Copy Send Scan to

USB
Adjust density.
(Value: [-4] to [+4] (Lighter to Darker))
6-11
Duplex
Copy Print from

USB
Produces two-sided prints. You can also create single-sided prints from two-sided originals.
The following modes are available.
One-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd
number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.
Original Copy
The following binding options are available.

A B
def
ghi
ghi
ghi
A Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.
abc
abc abc
B Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.
def
def Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation
when turning the pages.
Original Copy
Two-sided to One-sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets.
The following binding options are available.
• Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.
Original Copy
• Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.
Two-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals.
Original Copy
NOTE
The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided mode: A4, B5, A5-R, Folio, Legal, Letter, Statement, Oficio II,
Executive, 216 × 340 mm, ISO B5, Envelope C5, 16K
6-12
Copying
Prints 1-sided originals to 2-sided, or 2-sided originals to 1-sided. Select the binding orientation for original and finished
documents.

1-sided>>1-sided ― Disables the function.
1-sided>>2-sided ― Copy the original with the default setting. For the default
settings, refer to the following:
2-sided>>1-sided ―
Function Defaults (page 8-16)
2-sided>>2-sided ―
Others Duplex 1-sided>>1-sided, Select the desired duplex option.

1-sided>>2-sided,
2-sided>>1-sided,
2-sided>>2-sided
Binding in Original*1 Left/Right, Top Select the binding orientation of originals.
Binding in Finishing*2 Left/Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies.
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
Top Edge on Left scan correct direction.
*1 Displayed when [2-sided>>1-sided] or [2-sided>>2-sided] is selected for "Duplex".

*2 Displayed when [1-sided>>2-sided] or [2-sided>>2-sided] is selected for "Duplex".
When placing the original on the platen, consecutively replace each original and press the [Start] key.
After scanning all originals, select [Finish Scan] to start copying.
Printing
Print a document on both sides of the paper.
Item Description
1-sided Disables the function.
2-sided Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the left
or right.
2-sided Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the top.
6-13
Combine
Copy
Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page.

You can select the page layout and the type of boundary lines around the pages.
The following types of the boundary lines are available.
None Solid Line Dotted Line Positioning Mark

Off ― Disables the function.
2 in 1 ― Copy the original with the default setting. For the default settings,
refer to the following:
4 in 1 ―
Function Defaults (page 8-16)
Others Combine Off, Select the page layout of scanned originals.

2 in 1 (L to R/T to B),
2 in 1 (R to L/B to T),
4 in 1 (Right then Down),
4 in 1 (Left then Down),
4 in 1 (Down then Right),
4 in 1 (Down then Left)
Border Line*1 None, Select the boundary line type.

Solid Line,
Dotted Line,
Positioning Mark
Original Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan
Orientation*1 Top Edge on Left correct direction.
*1 Appears when [2 in 1] or [4 in 1] is selected in "Combine".
6-14
Layout image
Item Image
2 in 1 L to R/T to B
R to L/B to T
4 in 1 Right then Down
Left then Down
Down then Right
Down then Left
NOTE
• The paper sizes supported in Combine mode: A4, A5-R, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Oficio II,
16K
• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
6-15
Color Selection
Copy Send Print from Scan to

USB USB
Select the color mode setting.
Copying/Printing
Item Description
Full Color Prints documents in full color.
Black & White Prints documents in black and white.
Sending/Storing
Item Description
Full Color Scans the document in full color.
Grayscale Scans the document in grayscale. Produces a smooth, detailed image.
Black & White Scans the document in black and white.
Collate
Copy Print from

USB
Offsets the output by page or set.

(Value: [Off] / [On])
6-16
Original Size
Copy Send Scan to

USB
Specify the original size to be scanned.

Select [Auto (DP)], [Metric], [Inch], or [Others] to select the original size.

Auto (DP) ― Automatically detect the original size.
Metric A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm Select from the Metric standard sizes.
Inch Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II Select from the Inch series standard sizes.
Others 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Select from special standard sizes and
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, custom sizes.
Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),
Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom*1
*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to the following:
Custom Original Size (page 8-11)
NOTE
Select whether to automatically detect originals of the document processor.
Auto Detect Original Size (DP) (page 8-11)
Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size original.
6-17
Copy Send Scan to
USB
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.
• Duplex
• Combine
• Duplex (2-sided Original)
Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Item Image
Top Edge on Top
Original Original orientation
Top Edge on Left
Original Original orientation
NOTE
The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed.
6-18
Mixed Size Originals
Copy Send Scan to

USB
Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once.
This function cannot be used if platen is used.
Supported Combinations of Originals

Folio and A4 (Legal and Letter)
Original Image
Copy Send Scan to

USB
Select original image type for best results.
Copying/Printing
Item Description
Text+Photo*1 Best for mixed text and photo documents.
Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.
Text Best for documents that are mostly text.
Graphic/Map*2 Best for graphics and maps.
Printer Output*2 Best for documents printed on this machine originally.
*1 If gray text is not printed completely using [Text + Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.
*2 This function is displayed while copying.
Sending/Storing
Item Description
Text+Photo Best for mixed text and photo documents.
Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.
Text Best for documents that are mostly text.
Light Text/Fine Line Clearly reproduces faint characters written in pencil, etc., and thin lines on map originals or diagrams.
Text (for OCR)*1 Scanning produces an image that is suitable for OCR.
*1 This function is only available when "Color Selection" is set to [Black & White]. For details, refer to the following:
6-19
EcoPrint
Copy Print from

USB
EcoPrint saves toner when printing.

Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not required.
Hue Adjustment
Copy
Adjust the color (hue) of images.

Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow-red or yellow to a strong green-yellow to make more creative
copies.
Original
When adjusting yellow to When adjusting yellowish-red

more green, blue to more to more yellow, bluish-cyan to
magenta (the part) more blue (the part)
Item Description
Off
All Adjust hue for all colors.

Select [ ] or [ ] to adjust the hue.
Individual Select individual colors to adjust the hue.

Select [Red], [Yellow], [Green], [Cyan], [Blue] or [Magenta] and then select [ ] or [ ] to adjust the hue.
NOTE
This feature is used with full color and auto color copying.
These adjustments are especially useful on rich color images.
6-20
Color Balance
Copy
Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
Example:
Less Magenta Original More Magenta
Item Description
Off
On Cyan Select [ ] or [ ] on each side of the color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) to adjust
each color.
Magenta
Yellow
Black
NOTE
This feature is used with full color and auto color copying.
6-21
Sharpness
Copy Send Scan to

USB
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.

When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward
"Sharpen". When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire*1 patterns
appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward "Blur".
Less Sharp Original More Sharp
Item Description
[+1] to [+3] (Sharpen) Emphasizes the image outline.
[-1] to [-3] (Blur) Blurs the image outline. Can weaken a Moire*1 effect.
*1 Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
Contrast
Copy Send Scan to

USB
You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image.
Lower Original Higher
Item Description
[+1] to [+4] (Higher) Increases the sharpness of colors.
[-1] to [-4] (Lower) Creates smoother colors.
6-22
Background Density Adj. (Background Density

Adjustment)
Copy Send Scan to

USB
Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers.

This feature is used with full color.
Item Description
Off Does not adjust the ground color.
Manual Select [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background density manually.
Skip Blank Page
Copy Send Scan to

USB
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are
not blank.
When set to [High], the level at which blank paper is recognized is higher.
The machine detects blank pages, saving unnecessary printing without the need to check for blank pages in the
document.
Select [Low], [Middle] or [High] in [On].
NOTE
The originals with punched holes or originals printed on a colored substrate may not be recognized as blank pages.
6-23
Saturation
Copy
Adjust the color saturation of the image.
Grayish Original Vivid
Results in paler color. Results in more vivid color.
NOTE
This feature is used with full color.
Item Description
[-1] to [-3] (Grayish) Results in paler color.
[+1] to [+3] (Vivid) Results in more vivid color.
Continuous Scan
Copy Send Scan to

USB
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job.
Originals will be scanned continuously until you select [Finish Scan].
1 11 21 1
1~10 11~20 21~30 1~30
6-24
Job Finish Notice
Copy Print from Send Scan to

USB USB
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.

Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the
machine to finish.
NOTE
PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.
Embedded Web Server RX (page 2-52)
E-mail can be sent to a single destination.
Item Description
Off Disables the function.
On Displays the destination list.
Add a Destination
To add a new destination, select [Menu] > [Add].
• Address Book: Select the notification destination from the address book and select [OK].
• Ext. Address Book*1: Select the notification destination from the external address book.
• Address Entry: Enter the e-mail address directly. Enter the address (up to 128 characters)
and select [OK].
• My Address*2: Uses the e-mail address of the logged in user.
Check the Destination

To display details for the destinations, select [ ].
Delete the Destination

To delete the selected destination, select [ ].
*1 For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

*2 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.
6-25
File Name Entry
Copy Print from Send Scan to

USB USB
Adds a file name.

Additional information such as job number and date and time can also be set. You can check a job history or job status
using the file name, date and time, or job number specified here.
Enter the file name (up to 32 characters), and select [Next].
To add date and time, select [Date and Time]. To add job number, select [Job No.]. To add both, select [Job No. & Date
and Time] or [Date and Time & Job No.].
Priority Override
Copy Print from

USB
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority.
The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished.
NOTE
• This function is not available if current job was an override.
• Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage.
6-26
File Format
Send Scan to
USB
Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted.
Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS], [OpenXPS], and [High Comp. PDF].
When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.
If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption or PDF/A settings.

PDF ― Set the file format selected.
The image quality and PDF/A settings will be the default
High Comp. PDF ―
settings. For the default settings, refer to the following:
TIFF ― Function Defaults (page 8-16)
JPEG ―
XPS ―
OpenXPS ―
Others File Format PDF, High Comp. PDF, TIFF, Select the image file format.
JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS
Image Quality*1 Compression Ratio Priority, Set the quality level for High Compression PDF.
Standard, Quality Priority
Image Quality*2 1 Low (High Comp.) to 5 High Set the image quality.
(Low Comp.)
PDF/A*3 Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b Set PDF/A-1 format type.
Encryption*3 ― You can use PDF encryption functions.

PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-28)
*1 Displayed when [High Comp. PDF] is selected for "File Format".

*2 Displayed when something other than [High Comp. PDF] is selected for "File Format".
*3 Displayed when [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] is selected for "File Format".
NOTE
If encryption is enabled, PDF/A settings cannot be specified.
6-27
PDF Encryption Functions

If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and
editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
Select [Others], [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] in [File Format], and select [Encryption].
Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in [Compatibility].
Acrobat 3.0 and later, Encryption Level: Middle(40-bit)

Password to Open Document Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and
then select [Next].
Enter the password again for confirmation, and select [OK].
Password to Edit/Print Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Document Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and
then select [Next].
When you have entered the password to edit/print
document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Printing Allowed Not Allowed, Allowed Restricts printing of the PDF file.
Changes Allowed Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.
Commenting Can only add commenting.
Page Layout except extracting Can change the page layout except extracting the pages of
Pages the PDF file.
Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of
the PDF file.
Copying of Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Text/Images/Others
6-28
Acrobat 5.0 and later, Encryption Level: High(128-bit)

Password to Open Document Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and
then select [Next].
Password to Edit/Print Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Document Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and
then select [Next].
When you have entered the password to edit/print
document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Printing Allowed Not Allowed Disables the printing of PDF file.
Allowed (Low Resolution only) Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.
Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution.
Changes Allowed Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.
Inserting/Deleting/Rotating Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the PDF
Pages file.
Commenting Can only add commenting.
Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of
the PDF file.
Copying of Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Text/Images/Others
6-29
Duplex (2-sided Original)
Send Scan to
USB
Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original.

1-sided ― Disables the function.
2-sided ― Set when using a 2-sided sheet original.
Others Duplex 1-sided, Select the binding orientation of originals.

2-sided (Binding Left/Right),
2-sided (Binding Top)
Original Top Edge on Top, Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
Orientation*1 Top Edge on Left scan correct direction.
*1 Displayed when [2-sided (Binding Left/Right)] or [2-sided (Binding Top)] is selected in "Duplex".
Sample image
Value Image
2-sided Binding
Left/Right
Binding Top
6-30
Sending Size
Send
Select size of image to be sent.

Select [Same as Original Size], [Metric], [Inch], or [Others] to select the sending size.

Same as Original Size ― Automatically sends the same size as the
original.
Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom

Original Size, Sending Size and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below.
Original size and sending size are the same different

Original Size (page 6-17) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.
Sending Size Select [Same as Original Size]. Select the desired size.
Zoom (page 6-10) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].
NOTE
When you specify the sending size that is different from the original size, and select the zoom of [100%], you can send
the image as the actual size (No Zoom).
File Separation
Send Scan to
USB
Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and sends the files.
(Value: [Off] / [Each Page])
Select [Each Page] to set File Separation.
NOTE
A three-digit serial number such as "abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf..." is attached to the end of the file name.
6-31
Scan Resolution
Send Scan to
USB
Select fineness of scanning resolution.

(Value: [600 × 600dpi] / [400 × 400dpi Ultra] / [300 × 300dpi] / [200 × 400dpi Super] / [200 × 200dpi Fine] /
[200 × 100dpi Normal])
NOTE
The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and
longer send times.
When scanning a two-sided original in full color or grayscale, [600 × 600dpi], [400 × 400dpi Ultra], and [200 × 400dpi
Super] cannot be selected.
E-mail Subject/Body
Send
Adds subject and body when sending a document.

Select [Subject] / [Body] to enter the E-mail subject/body.
NOTE
The subject can include up to 60 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.
6-32
FTP Encrypted TX
Send
Encrypts images when sending via FTP.

Encryption secures the document transmission.
NOTE
Click [Security Settings], and then [Network Security] in the Embedded Web Server RX. Be sure that "SSL" of
Secure Protocol Settings is "On" and one or more effective encryption are selected in Client side settings.
Storing Size
Scan to
USB
Select size of image to be stored.

Select [Same as Original Size], [Metric], [Inch], or [Others] to select the storing size.

Same as Original Size ― Store an image the same size as the original.
Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2
Relationship between Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom

Original Size, Storing Size and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below.
Original Size and the size you wish to

the same different
store as are
Original Size (page 6-17) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.
Storing Size Select [Same as Original Size]. Select the desired size.
Zoom (page 6-10) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].
NOTE
When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the image
as the actual size (No Zoom).
6-33
Encrypted PDF Password

Print from
USB
Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data.

Enter the Password, and select [OK].
NOTE
For details on entering the password, refer to the following:
JPEG/TIFF Print
Print from
USB
Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.

(Value: [Paper Size] / [Image Resolution] / [Print Resolution])
Item Description
Paper Size Fits the image size to the selected paper size.
Image Resolution Prints at resolution of the actual image.
Print Resolution Fits the image size to the print resolution.
XPS Fit to Page

Print from
USB
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.
6-34
7 Status/Job Cancel
Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Details of the Status Screens ................................................................................................................... 7-3
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-7
Checking Job History ......................................................................................................................................... 7-8
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ........................................................................................ 7-9
Sending the Log History .......................................................................................................................... 7-9
Job Operation .................................................................................................................................................. 7-10
Pause and Resumption of Jobs ............................................................................................................. 7-10
Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................................................. 7-10
Device/Communication ..................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ......................................................... 7-13
7-1
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Checking Job Status

Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens

The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens - Printing
Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs.
The following job statuses are available.
Status Display Job status to be displayed

Print Job Status • Copy
• Printer
• FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Printing from Document Box
• Printing data from removable memory
• Application
• Job Report/List
Send Job Status • FAX transmission

• E-mail
• Folder transmission
• Application
• Multiple destination
Store Job Status • Scan

• FAX
• Printer
Scheduled Job • Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
Displaying Status Screens

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Select the job you want to check.

Select either of [Print Job Status], [Send Job Status], [Store Job Status] or [Scheduled
Job] to check the status.
Print Job Status Screen (page 7-3)

Send Job Status Screen (page 7-4)
Store Job Status Screen (page 7-5)
Scheduled Job Status Screen (page 7-6)
7-2
Details of the Status Screens
NOTE
• You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs.
• This setting can be changed from Embedded Web Server RX.
Print Job Status Screen
Status/Job Cancel. 10:10

Print Job Status
1 0089 doc0000892010092514... 5/23
doc0000892010092515... Waiting
1/1
doc0000892010092520... Waiting
2 3 4 5
Cancel Pause All Close
Print Jobs
6 7
1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job
2 Type Icons that indicate the job type
Copy job
Printer job
Job from Document Box
FAX reception
E-mail reception
Data from removable memory
Application
Report/List
3 Job Name Job Name or file name
4 [ ] Select this key for the job for which you wish to display detailed
information.
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-7)
5 Status Status of job

(Number of copies printed)/(Total number of copies to be printed):
Printing
Processing: The status before starting to print.
Waiting: Print Waiting
Pause: Pausing print job or error
Canceling: Canceling the job
6 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and select this key.
7 [Pause All Print Jobs] Pauses all the printing jobs. By selecting this key again, the printing jobs
will be resumed.
7-3
Send Job Status Screen

Send Job Status
1 0005 0123456 Process
2 3 4 5 1/1
Cancel Close
6

Sending Job FAX
Sending Job E-mail
Sending Job Folder (SMB/FTP)
Sending Job Application
Multi Sending
3 Job Name Job Name or file name
information.

Processing: The status before starting sending such as during scanning
originals
Sending: Sending
Waiting: Waiting Sending
Pause: Pausing the job
7-4
Store Job Status Screen

Store Job Status
1 0016 doc0000162010082913... Storing
2 3 4 5 1/1
Cancel Close
6

Storing Job Scan
Storing Job Printer
Storing Job FAX
3 Job Name Job name or file name is displayed.
information.

Processing: The status before starting to save such as during scanning
originals
Storing: Storing Data
Pause: Pausing the job
7-5
Scheduled Job Status Screen

Scheduled Job
1 0014 A OFFICE 12:00
2 3 4 5 1/1
Menu Cancel Close
6 7

Storing Job FAX
3 Destination Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, or No. of broadcast

items)
information.
5 Start Time Time to start the scheduled job
6 [Menu] Selecting this key displays [Start Now]. Select the job you wish to send
immediately > [Menu] > [Start Now]
7-6
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs
NOTE
When you have logged in as a user, you can only check your own jobs. When you have logged in as administrator,
you can check all jobs.

Details of the Status Screens (page 7-3)

1 Select [ ] for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.

Send Job Status
0005 0123456 Process
1/1
Menu Cancel Close
Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.

Use [ ] or [ ] to see the next or previous page of information. More detailed information can be
checked if a white item is selected.
In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by selecting [Status/Destination].
2 To exit from the detailed information, select [End].
7-7
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Checking Job History
NOTE
• Job history is also available by Embedded Web Server RX or NETWORK PRINT MONITOR from the computer.
NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide
• You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log.
• This setting can also be changed from Embedded Web Server RX.
Available Job History Screens

The job histories are displayed separately in four screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and FAX Jobs.
The following job histories are available.
Screen Job histories to be displayed

Print Job Log • Copy
• Printer
• FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Printing from Document Box
• Job Report/List
• Printing data from removable memory
• Application
Send Job Log • FAX

• E-mail
• Folder
• Application
• Multiple destination
Store Job Log • Scan

• FAX
• Printer
FAX Job Log FAX Operation Guide
Display Job History Screen

2 Select the job you want to check.
7-8
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories

Display Job History Screen (page 7-8)

1 Select [ ] for the job for which you wish to check details.

Print Job Log
0011 doc0000112010081817... Completed
0010 doc0000102010081815... Canceled

1/3
0009 doc0000092010081815... Completed
0008 doc Error
Close
Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.
NOTE
To check the information of the next/previous page, select [ ] or [ ].
2 To exit from the detailed information, select [Close].
Sending the Log History

You can send the log history by E-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically
whenever a set number of jobs is reached.
Sending Log History (page 8-7)
7-9
Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation
Job Operation
Pause and Resumption of Jobs
Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.

2 Select [Pause All Print Jobs] on the printing jobs status screen.
Printing is paused.
When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Resume All Print Jobs].
Canceling of Jobs
A job in printing/waiting status can be canceled.

2 Select the job to be canceled from the list, and select [Cancel].
3 Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
7-10
Status/Job Cancel > Device/Communication
Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status.

1 Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Select the device you wish to check.

The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed.
2 Check the status.

The items you can check are described below.
"Scanner"
Statuses such as the original scanning status and standby are displayed.
"Printer"
Error information such as waiting or printing are displayed.
"FAX"
• The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.
• Select [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving.
FAX Operation Guide
"Removable Memory (USB Memory)"

• The usage, capacity and free space of the external media connected to this machine are
displayed.
• Select [Menu] > [Format] to format external media.
IMPORTANT
When [Format] is selected, all data in the external media is erased.
• Select [Remove] to safely remove the external media.
"USB Keyboard"
The status of the optional USB Keyboard is displayed.
"Network Connection Status"

The network connection status appears.
7-11
Status/Job Cancel > Device/Communication
"Wi-Fi Direct"
• Information on the device that is connected by Wi-Fi Direct appears.
• Select [Connected Device List] to display the list of connected devices. To refresh the list,
select [Reload] in the Connected Device List screen. To disconnect all devices, select
[Disconnect All].
• Select [Push Button Setup] and execute the push button of the device you want to
connect to start the connection to the machine.
"Wi-Fi"
The Wi-Fi connection status and network name (SSID) of the machine appear.
7-12
Status/Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner

and Paper (Paper/Supplies)
Check the remaining amount of toner, and paper on the touch panel.

1 Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Select the device you wish to check.
2 Check the status.

The items you can check are described below.
"Toner Status"
The amount of toner remaining is shown in levels.
"Paper Status"
The amount of paper remaining is shown.
7-13
8 Setup and Registration
(System Menu)
System Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Operation Method .................................................................................................................................... 8-2
System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-3
Language ................................................................................................................................................. 8-5
Report ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
User Property ........................................................................................................................................... 8-7
Cassette/MP Tray Settings ...................................................................................................................... 8-8
Common Settings .................................................................................................................................. 8-10
Home ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-19
Copy ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-20
Send ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-21
Document Box ....................................................................................................................................... 8-22
FAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-22
Address Book/One Touch ...................................................................................................................... 8-22
User Login/Job Accounting .................................................................................................................... 8-23
Printer .................................................................................................................................................... 8-24
System/Network ..................................................................................................................................... 8-26
Date/Timer/Energy Saver ...................................................................................................................... 8-38
Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 8-41
8-1
Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu
System Menu
Configure settings related to overall machine operation.
Operation Method

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key.
2 Select a function.
1 Displays the System Menu items.
System Menu/Counter.
System Menu
1 10:10
Quick Setup Wizard

2 Scrolls up and down when the list of
values cannot be displayed in its
Language
1/5
entirety on a single screen.
Report
3 Displays setting items.
Counter
Select the key of a function to display
the setting screen.
2
Close
4 Returns to the previous screen.

Date/Timer/Energy Saver
Date/Time
10/10/2014 10:10 3
Date Format
DD/MM/YYYY
1/4
Time Zone
+09:00 Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo
Auto Panel Reset

On
< Back
4

1 Selecting a value it to be accepted.
System Menu/Counter.
Date/Timer/Energy Saver - Time Zone
1 10:10
-12:00 International Date Line West

2 Returns to the original screen without
making any changes.
-11:00 Universal Coordinated Time-11
1/24 3 Accepts the settings and exits.
-10:00 Hawaii
-09:00 Alaska
2 Cancel OK
3
NOTE
In order to change settings that require administer privileges, you must log in with administrator privileges.
If function default settings have been changed, the [Reset] key can be selected in each function screen to
immediately change the settings.
Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.
8-2
System Menu Settings

This section explains the functions that can be configured in System Menu. To configure the settings, select the item in
System Menu and select the setting item. For details on each function, see the table below.
Item Description Reference Page

Quick Setup Wizard The Quick Setup Wizard configures Fax, Paper, Network and Energy page 2-35
Saver settings.
Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel. page 8-5
Print Report Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings page 8-5
for printing reports can also be configured.
Admin Report Settings Refer to the FAX
Operation Guide.
Result Report Settings page 8-6

Sending Log History page 8-7
Counter This counts the number of pages printed or scanned. page 2-50
User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of page 8-7
that information.
Cassette 1 (2) Select type of paper in Cassette 1 (2). page 8-8
Multipurpose Tray Select type of paper in multipurpose tray. page 8-9
Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). page 8-10
Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. page 8-10
Original Settings Configures settings for originals. page 8-11
Paper Settings Configures settings for paper. page 8-13
Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed page 8-16
or the [Reset] key is selected.
Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting
the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.
Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. page 8-17
Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. page 8-18
Color Toner Empty Action Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White page 8-18
setting is used for printing once the color toner runs out.
Measurement Select metric or inch for the unit for paper dimensions. page 8-18
Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to page 8-18
order a toner when the toner is running low.
Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters. page 8-19
USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use. page 8-19
Format SD Card Format an SD/SDHC memory card. page 8-19
Display Status/Log Set the display method of the Status/Log. page 8-19
Show Power Off Message Select whether the confirmation message is displayed, when Power page 8-19
Switch is pressed.
Home Configure settings for Home screen. page 8-19
Copy Configures settings for copying functions. page 8-20
Send Configures settings for sending functions. page 8-21
Document Box Configures settings related to the Job Box, Sub Address Box and Polling page 8-22
Box. For details on Sub Address Box and Polling Box, refer to the following:
FAX Operation Guide
8-3

FAX Configures settings for fax functions. —
FAX Operation Guide
Address Book/One Touch Configures Address Book and One Touch Key settings. page 8-22
Address Book:
Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-20)
One Touch Key:
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page
3-26)
User Login/Job Accounting Configures settings related to machine management. —

User Login:
Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)
Job Accounting:
Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-28)
Printer Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application page 8-24
software screen. However, the following settings are available for
configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
Network Configures network settings. page 8-26
Primary Network (Client) Specify the network to be used for the send function, the network page 8-36
authentication and connecting to external address book.
Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with page 8-36
external devices such as USB hosts.
Security Level The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service —
personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use
this menu.
Restart Restart the machine without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal page 8-37
with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer
restart.)
RAM Disk Setting A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set. page 8-37
Optional Memory When optional memory is installed, select the memory allocation scheme page 8-37
based on the application in which you are using the equipment.
Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. page 8-37
Date/Timer/Energy Saver Configures settings related to the date and time. page 8-38
Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. page 8-41
8-4
Language
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Language]
Item Description
Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel.
Report
Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings for printing reports can also be configured.
Report Print
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Report Print]
Item Description
Status Page Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current settings, memory
capacity, and optional equipment installed.
Status Page
Font List Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.
Network Status Prints the network status, allowing you to check the information including network interface
firmware version, network address and protocol.
Network Status Page
Service Status Prints the service status. More detailed information is available than on the Status Page.
Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose.
8-5
Item Description
Accounting Report Prints the accounting report, allowing you to check the accounts that have been registered on
the machine.
Sub Address Box List Prints the report on the FAX function.
FAX List (Index) FAX Operation Guide
FAX List (No.)
Outgoing FAX Report
Incoming FAX Report
Admin Report Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Admin Report Settings]
Configure settings for Outgoing FAX report and Incoming FAX report.
FAX Operation Guide
Result Report Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Result Report Settings]
Item Description
Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.
E-mail/Folder Automatically print a report of transmission result when E-mail or SMB/FTP transmission is
complete.
Value: Off, On, Error Only
FAX FAX Operation Guide
Canceled before Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent.
Sending*1 Value: Off, On
Recipient Format*1 Select the Recipient Format for the send result report.
Value: Name or Destination, Name and Destination
RX Result Report FAX Operation Guide
Job Finish Notice Setting Attaches sent images to job finish notices.
Value: Do Not Attach Image, Attach Image
*1 When "E-mail/Folder" and "FAX" are set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.
8-6
Sending Log History

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Sending Log History]
Item Description
Sending Log History You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.
Auto Sending This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set
number of jobs has been logged.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories. The setting range is 1 to 16.
Destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail address can be set.
Job Log Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail.
Value: Up to 60 characters
Personal Information Select whether to include personal information in the job log.
Value: Include, Exclude
User Property
[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Property]
Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information.
Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)
8-7
Cassette/MP Tray Settings

Select paper size and media type for cassettes and multipurpose tray.
Cassette 1 (2)
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [Cassette 1 (2)]
Select paper size and media type for Cassettes 1 and 2.
Selection Item Selectable Size/Type

Paper Size Metric Select from the Metric standard sizes.
Values: A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm
Inch Select from the Inch series standard sizes.

Values: Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II
Other Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.

Values: 16K, ISO B5, Custom*1
Media type*2 Select the media type.

Values: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Rough, Vellum (60 to 163 g/m2), Recycled,
Preprinted*3, Bond, Color, Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Thick (106 to 163 g/m2),
High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
*1 The custom paper sizes are set for each cassette.

*2 To change to a media type other than "Plain".
When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.
*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.
8-8
Multipurpose Tray
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [Multipurpose Tray]
Select paper size and media type for the multipurpose tray.
Item Description
Paper Size Metric Select from the Metric standard sizes.
Values: A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm
Inch Select from the Inch series standard sizes.

Values: Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Statement, Executive, Oficio II
Other Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.

Values: 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock),
Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom*1
Media Type*2 Select the media type.

Values: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Rough, Transparency, Vellum (60 to 220 g/m2),
Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*3, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*3,
Letterhead*3, Envelope, Thick (106 to 220 g/m2), Coated, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size.

*2 To change to a media type other than "Plain".
*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.
8-9
Common Settings
Configures overall machine operation.
Default Screen
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Default Screen]
Item Description
Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).
Value: Home, Copy, Send, FAX, Job Box, Removable Memory, Sub Address Box,
Polling Box, Favorites, Status
Sound
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Sound]
Item Description
Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are selected.
Value: Off, On
Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.

Value: Off, On, FAX Reception Only
Ready Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.

Value: Off, On
Warning Emit a sound when errors occur.

Value: Off, On
USB Keyboard Emit a sound to confirm keypresses with a sound.

Value: Off, On
FAX Speaker Volume FAX Operation Guide
FAX Monitor Volume FAX Operation Guide
8-10
Original Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Original Settings]
Configure settings for originals.
Item Description
Custom Original Size Set up frequently-used custom original size.
The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select original size.
Value
Metric
X: 50 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 50 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X=Length, Y=Width
Horizontal
Auto Detect Original Size (DP) Select whether to automatically detect originals of the document processor.
Auto Detect Select whether to enable automatic detection of original size.

Value: off, on
System of Units Select metric or inch for the unit of original size detection.
Value: Metric, Inch
Legal/OficioII/ As Legal, OficioII and 216 x 340 mm are similar in size, select either one of them for automatic
216 x 340 mm detection.
Value: Legal, OficioII, 216 x 340 mm
NOTE
When [System of Units] is set to [Metric], this function will not be displayed.
8-11
Item Description
Default Original Size Set the default original size.
Value
Metric: A4, A5, A6, B5, B6
Inch: Letter, Statement, Executive
Others: 16K
NOTE
When [Auto Detect] is set to [On], this function will not be displayed.
Default Original Size (Platen) Select a default size for the originals placed on the platen.
If [Off] is selected, a confirmation will be displayed before each job is processed.
Value
Off
Metric: A4, A5, A6, B5, B6
Inch: Letter, Statement, Executive
Others: 16K
NOTE
When [Auto Detect] is set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.
8-12
Paper Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Paper Settings]
Configure settings for paper.
Item Description
Custom Paper Size Set up frequently-used custom paper size.
One custom paper size is set for each paper supply source. The custom size option is
displayed on the screen to select paper size.
Cassette 1 Size Register the custom paper size to be used in Cassette 1.

Value
Metric
Inch
X=Length, Y=Width
Vertical
Cassette 2 Size Register the custom paper size to be used in Cassette 2.

Value
Metric
Inch
MP Tray Size Register the custom paper size to be used in the multipurpose tray.
Value
Metric
Inch
X=Length, Y=Width
Vertical Horizontal
8-13
Item Description
Media Type Setting Select weight for each media type.
For Custom 1 to 8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Default Paper Source Select the default paper source.

Value: Cassette 1 (2), Multipurpose Tray
NOTE
[Cassette 2] is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
Paper Selection Set the default paper selection.

Value
Auto: Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals.
Default Paper Source: Select paper source set by "Default Paper Source".
Media for Auto (Color) Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper
Selection. If [Plain] is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is
Media for Auto (B&W) selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the
specific size.
Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, Coated,
High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or
the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the
combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adjust Print Direction] to adjust the
print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed Priority].
If [Adjust Print Direction] is selected, load paper according to the steps below.
Example: copying on Letterhead
Original Paper Finished Cassette Multipurpose Tray
Original Paper Finished Cassette Multipurpose Tray
Value: Adjust Print Direction, Speed Priority
Show Paper Setup Message Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper setting when a new paper is set for
each cassette.
Cassette 1 (2)
Value: Off, On
Multipurpose Tray
NOTE
[Cassette 2] is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
8-14
Media Type Setting

The following media type and paper weight combinations are available.
Paper Weight Weight (g/m2) Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)

Light 52 g/m² to 59 g/m² Heavy 1*1 106 g/m² to 135 g/m²
Normal 1 60 g/m² to 74 g/m² Heavy 2*1 136 g/m² to 163 g/m²
Normal 2 75 g/m² to 90 g/m² Heavy 3*1 164 g/m² to 220 g/m²
Normal 3 91 g/m² to 105 g/m² Extra Heavy*1 Transparencies
*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.

Each media type's default weight is indicated.
Media Type Default Media Type Default

Plain Normal 2 Color Normal 2
Rough Normal 3 Prepunched Normal 2
Vellum Heavy 1 Letterhead Normal 2
Labels Heavy 1 Envelope Heavy 2
Recycled Normal 2 Thick Heavy 2
Preprinted Normal 2 High Quality Normal 2
Bond Normal 3 Coated Heavy 1
Cardstock Heavy 3 Custom 1 to 8 Normal 2
For Custom 1 to 8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Item Description
Duplex Print Permit Duplex printing allowed.
Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed.
Name Change names for Custom 1 to 8. Names should be not more than 16 characters. Selecting
media type at multipurpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.
8-15
Function Defaults
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults]
Item Description
File Format Select the default type of the files to be sent.
Value: PDF, High Comp. PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS
Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults.

Value: Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left
Collate Set the defaults for Collate.

Value: Off, On
File Separation Select the default file separation setting.

Value: Off, Each Page
Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution.

Value: 600×600dpi, 400×400dpi Ultra Fine, 300×300dpi, 200×400dpi Super Fine,
200×200dpi Fine, 200×100dpi Normal
Color Selection (Copy) Set the default copying color mode setting.
Value: Full Color, Black & White
Color Select.(Send/Store) Select the default color mode for scanning documents.
Value: Full Color, Grayscale, Black & White
Original Image (Copy) Set the default original document type for copying.
Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Graphic/Map, Printer Output
Original Image (Send/Store) Set the default original document type for sending/storing.
Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Text (for OCR), Light Text/Line
NOTE
[Text (for OCR)] is only available when "Color Selection" is set to [Black & White].
Background Density Adj. Set the default Background Density (Copy).

(Copy) Value: Off, Manual (Darker 5)
Background Density Adj. Set the default Background Density (Send/Store).

(Send/Store) Value: Off, Manual (Darker 5)
EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default.

Value: Off, On
Skip Blank Page (Copy) Set the default Skip Blank Page (Copy) settings.
Value: Off, On
Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) Set the default Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) settings.
Value: Off, On
FAX TX Resolution FAX Operation Guide
Zoom Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set.
Value: 100%, Auto
Continuous Scan (Copy) Set the continuous scan (Copy) defaults.

Value: Off, On
Continuous Scan (FAX) FAX Operation Guide
Continuous Scan (Send/Store) Set the continuous scan (Send/Store) defaults.

Value: Off, On
8-16
Item Description
File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and
Time and Job No. can also be set.
Value
File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Additional Info: None, Date and Time, Job No., Job No. & Date and Time, Date and Time
& Job No.
E-mail Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the
scanned originals by E-mail.
Value
Subject: Up to 60 characters can be entered.
Body: Up to 500 characters can be entered.
FTP Encrypted TX Set the default value for document encryption during transmission.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the security settings "SSL" setting is [On].
JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.
Value: Paper Size, Image Resolution, Print Resolution
XPS Fit to Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.
Value: Off, On
Detail Settings —
Image Quality Set the default value for the image quality adjustment range when selecting the file format with
which to send and store images.
Value: 1 Low (High Comp.), 2, 3, 4, 5 High (Low Comp.)
PDF/A Set the default value for PDF/A when selecting the file format with which to send and store
images.
Value: Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b
High Comp. PDF Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.
Value: Compression Ratio Priority, Standard, Quality Priority
Blank Detection Level Select the default Blank Detection Level (Copy) settings.
(Copy) Value: Low, Middle, High
Blank Detection Level Select the default Blank Detection Level (Send/Store) settings.
(Send/Store) Value: Low, Middle, High
Preset Limit
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Preset Limit]
Item Description
Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.
Value: 1 to 999 copies.
8-17
Error Handling
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Error Handling]
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred.
Item Description
Duplexing Error Set what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and media
types.
Value
1-sided: Printed in 1-sided
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Paper Mismatch Error Set what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded
in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or
multipurpose tray.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Color Toner Empty Action

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Color Toner Empty Action]
Item Description
Color Toner Empty Action Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White setting is used for printing
once the color toner runs out.
Value: Stop printing, Print in Black & White
Measurement
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Measurement]
Item Description
Measurement Select metric or inch for the unit for paper dimensions.
Value: mm, inch
Low Toner Alert

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Low Toner Alert]
Item Description
Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner when the
toner is running low.
This notification is used for event report, Status Monitor, SNMP Trap.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to 100% (in
1% increments).
8-18
Keyboard Layout
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Keyboard Layout]
Item Description
Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters.
Value: QWERTY, QWERTZ, AZERTY
USB Keyboard Type

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [USB Keyboard Type]
Item Description
USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use.
Value: US-English, US-English with Euro, French, German
Format SD Card
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Format SD Card]
Format an SD/SDHC memory card.
A new SD card must be formatted before it can be used in the machine.
IMPORTANT
Formatting will destroy any existing data on a storage device including a used SD card.
Display Status/Log
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Display Status/Log]
Item Description
Display Status/Log Set the display method of the Status/Log.
Display Jobs Detail Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All
Status
Display Jobs Log Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All
Display FAX Log Value: Show All, Hide All
Show Power Off Message

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Show Power Off Message]
Item Description
Show Power Off Message Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply off.
Value: Off, On
Home
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Home]
Configure settings for Home screen.
8-19
Copy
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Copy]
Configures settings for copying functions.
Item Description
Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom
changes.
Value
Most Suitable Size: Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.
Same as Original Size: Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the
zoom.
Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic
zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.
Value: Off, On
DP Read Action When the document processor is used, select the scanning operation for the document
processor.
Value
Speed Priority: Gives priority to scanning speed.
Quality Priority: Gives priority to image quality at a slightly slower scan speed.
Platen Scan Action When the platen is used, select the scanning operation for the platen.
Value
Speed Priority: Gives priority to scanning speed.
Quality Priority: Gives priority to image quality at a slightly slower scan speed.
8-20
Send
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Send]
Configures settings for sending functions.
Item Description
Dest. Check before Send When performing sending jobs, display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing
the [Start] key.*1
Value: Off, On
Entry Check for New Dest. When adding new destination, display the entry check screen to check the entered
destination.*1
Value: Off, On
Send and Forward Set whether to send the original to another destination and store it when sending images.
Forward Set the rule to send the original.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], select rules to forward from [FAX], [E-mail], [Folder (SMB)] and
[Folder (FTP)].
Destination Set the destination to which the original is forwarded. One destination can be set. You can
check and edit the set address.
Follow the steps below to register the destination.
• Address Book
• Ext. Address Book
• Address Entry (E-mail)
• Address Entry (folder)
Color TIFF Compression Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine.
Value: TIFF V6, TTN2
Default Screen Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you select the [Send] key.
Value: Destination, Address Book, Ext. Address Book, One Touch
New Destination Entry Select whether to permit direct entry of destination.

Value: Prohibit, Permit*1
Recall Destination Select whether to permit usage of [Recall] on the Send screen.*1
Value: Prohibit, Permit
*1 Also applies when sending the fax.
8-21
Document Box
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Document Box]
Configures settings related to the Job Box, Sub Address Box and Polling Box.
Item Description
Sub Address Box FAX Operation Guide
Job Box Configure settings for Job Box.
Quick Copy Job To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Retention Value: number between 0 and 300
NOTE
When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.
Deletion of Job This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and
Retention Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been
saved for a set time.
Value: Off, 1 hour, 4 hours, 1 day, 1 week
NOTE
This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function
setting, temporary documents are deleted when the power switch is turned off.
Polling Box FAX Operation Guide
FAX
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FAX]
Configure settings for FAX.
FAX Operation Guide
Address Book/One Touch

Address Book
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book]
Configure settings for address book.
Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-20)
One Touch Key

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [One Touch Key]
Configure settings for One Touch Key.
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-26)
8-22
Address Book Defaults

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book Defaults]
Item Description
Sort Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book.
Value: No., Name
Address Book Specify the default sort setting of the external address book.
Print list
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Print list]
FAX Operation Guide
User Login/Job Accounting

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
Configure settings related to machine management.
Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)
Unknown User Settings (page 9-42)
8-23
Printer
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Printer]
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following
settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
Item Description
Emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of
printers.
Value: PCL6, KPDL, KPDL (Auto)
NOTE
When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)], set "Alt Emulation", too.
When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], set "KPDL Error Report", too.
Alt Emulation When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between KPDL
and another emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to the data to
print.
Value: PCL6
KPDL Error Report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the
error report is output.
Value: Off, On
Color Setting You can choose whether reports are printed in color or black and white.
Value: Color, Black & White
EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded
printing is not a problem.
Value: Off, On
Override A4/Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when
printing.
Value
Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.
On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use whichever size
is in the paper source.
Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode.

Value: 1-sided, 2-sided Bind LongEdge, 2-sided Bind ShortEdge
Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.

Value: 1 to 999 copies
Orientation Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape].

Value: Portrait, Landscape
Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for
an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitch). This
setting is only effective in PCL6 emulation.
Value: Off, On
Form Feed TimeOut Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no
information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the
preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and
495 seconds.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH).
Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF
8-24
Item Description
CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character
code 0DH).
Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR
Job Name Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], select the job name to be displayed from [Job Name], [Job No. & Job
Name], or [Job Name & Job No.].
User Name Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Value: Off, On
MP Tray Priority If paper is set in the multipurpose tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that
multipurpose tray in the paper feed.
Value
Off: The printer driver settings are followed.
Auto Feed: If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the multipurpose
tray then the paper feed will be from the multipurpose tray.
Always: If there is paper in the multipurpose tray then the paper feed will be from the
multipurpose tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver.
Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are
specified.
Value
Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.
Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
Auto cassette Change Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while printing.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [Off], the machine displays "Add the following paper in cassette #." (# is a
cassette number) or "Add the following paper in the multipurpose tray.", and stops printing.
Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing.
To print from the other paper cassette, select [Paper Selection]. Select the desired paper
source.
When selecting [On], the machine continues printing automatically when the other cassette
contains the same paper as the currently-used cassette.
Resolution Set the resolution used for printing.

Value: 600 dpi, 1200 dpi
NOTE
Settings that are received from the printer driver have priority over the operation panel settings.
Gloss Mode Gloss Mode increases the effect of glossiness in printing. However, printing takes longer time.
Value: Off, On
IMPORTANT
Gloss Mode is not available when [Labels] or [Transparency] is selected as the paper
type setting.
Depending on the paper used, printing in gloss mode may cause curl in paper.
To reduce curl, try using thicker paper.
8-25
System/Network
Configures machine system settings.
Network
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network]
Configures network settings.
Host Name
Item Description
Host Name Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Embedded Web Server RX.
Changing Device Information (page 2-56)
Wi-Fi Direct Settings

Set Wi-Fi Direct.
Item Description
Wi-Fi Direct Select whether to use Wi-Fi Direct.
Value: Off, On
Device Name Specify the device name.
NOTE
• Up to 32 characters can be entered.
• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
IP Address Check the IP address of the machine.

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-28)
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
Auto Disconnect Automatically disconnect devices connected through Wi-Fi Direct.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
• If you select [ON], set the waiting time for automatic disconnection.
• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
Wi-Fi Settings
Set Wi-Fi.
Item Description
Wi-Fi Select whether to use Wi-Fi.
Value: Off, On
8-26
Item Description
Setup -
Connection Status Check the wireless LAN status.
Quick Setup Wizard If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless network
setup, connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.
NOTE
When [Reload] is selected, the list is reloaded.
If you are connecting to an access point that has WEP enabled, select [WEP Key Index] and
select the WEP key index.
Available Network Displays access points to which the machine can connect.
WEP Key Index Select the key index of the access point.
Value: 0 to 3
Push Button Method If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be configured using
the push button. This setting executes push button, and the connection is started by pressing
the push button on the access point.
NOTE
The push button method supports only the WPS.
PIN Code Method Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access point. The
(Device) PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.
Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.
Network Name (SSID) Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine connects.
NOTE
Network Authentication Select network authentication type.

Value: Open, WPA2/WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA2/WPA-EAP, WPA2-EAP
Encryption Select encryption method. The setting values vary depending on the Network Authentication
setting.
Network Encryption
Authentication
Open Disable ―
WEP WEP Key: Up to 26 characters

WEP Key Index: 0 to 3
WPA2/WPA-PSK Data Encryption: AES, Auto

Preshared Key: Up to 64 characters
WPA2-PSK Data Encryption: AES , Auto

Preshared Key: Up to 64 characters
WPA2/WPA-EAP Data Encryption: AES, Auto
WPA2-EAP Data Encryption: AES, Auto
8-27
Item Description
TCP/IP Setting -
TCP/IP Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.

Value: Off, On
IPv4 Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is set to
[On].
DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.

Value: Off, On
Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.

Value: Off, On
IP Address Set the IP address.

Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be entered.
Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.

Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.

Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
IMPORTANT
• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].
• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
8-28
Item Description
IPv6 Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is [On].
IPv6 Select whether to use IPv6.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Link Local)] after restarting the network.
Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6).
Value
IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of
four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
Prefix Length: 0 to 128
Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit
hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
NOTE
• This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
• To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].
RA (Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).

Value: Off, On
NOTE
• Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after restarting the network.
DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.

Value: Off, On
NOTE
• Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the network.
Restart Network Restarts the network.
IMPORTANT
Wired Network Settings

Configure wired network settings.
Item Description
TCP/IP Setting For details on setting value.
TCP/IP Setting (page 8-28)
LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.
Value: Auto, 10BASE-Half, 10BASE-Full, 100BASE-Half, 100BASE-Full, 1000BASE-T
IMPORTANT
8-29
Bonjour
Item Description
Protocol Setting Select whether to use Bonjour.
Value: Off, On
Available Network Set whether to enable this function for each network.
(Wi-Fi Direct) Value: Disable, Enable
Available Network (Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
IPSec
Item Description
IPSec Make this setting when you use IPSec.
Value: Off, On
Protocol Settings
Configure protocol settings.
Item Description
NetBEUI -
Protocol Setting Selects whether to receive documents using NetBEUI.*1

Value: Off, On
Available Network (Wi-Fi) NOTE
Available Network This function is displayed when [Protocol Setting] is set to [On].
(Wired Network)
LPD -
Protocol Setting Selects whether to receive documents using LPD.*1

Value: Off, On
(Wired Network)
SMTP (E-mail TX) Select whether to send E-mail using SMTP.

Value: Off, On
POP3 (E-mail RX) Select whether to receive E-mail using POP3.

Value: Off, On
FTP Client (Transmission) Select whether to send documents using FTP. When selecting [On], set the FTP Port Number.
The default port number is 21.
Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1-65535)
8-30
Item Description
FTP Server (Reception) -
Protocol Setting Select whether to receive documents using FTP.*1

Value: Off, On
(Wired Network)
SMB Client (Transmission): Select whether to send documents using SMB. When selecting [On], set the SMB default Port
Number. The default port number is 445.
Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1-65535)
WSD Scan -
Protocol Setting Select whether to use WSD Scan.*1

Value: Off, On
(Wired Network)
WSD Print -
Protocol Setting Set whether to use our proprietary web services. WIA driver, TWAIN driver and Network FAX
driver use this Enhanced WSD web service.*1
Value: Off, On
(Wired Network)
DSM Scan Select whether to use DSM scan.*1

Value: Off, On
LDAP Select whether to use LDAP.

Value: Off, On
SNMP -
Protocol Setting Select whether to communicate using SNMP.*1

Value: Off, On
(Wired Network)
8-31
Item Description
SNMPv3 -
Protocol Setting Select whether to communicate using SNMPv3.*1

Value: Off, On
(Wired Network)
HTTP -
Protocol Setting Select whether to communicate using HTTP.*1

Value: Off, On
(Wired Network)
HTTPS -
Protocol Setting Select whether to communicate using HTTPS.*1, *2

Value: Off, On
(Wired Network)
IPP -
Protocol Setting Selects whether to receive documents using IPP. To use the IPP protocol, select [Not Secure
(IPP&IPPS)] on IPP Security under Security Settings from the Embedded Web Server RX.*1
Value: Off, On
Port Number Set the IPP default Port Number. The default port number is 631.
Value: 1-32767
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Protocol Setting] is set to [On].
(Wired Network)
8-32
Item Description
IPP over SSL -
Protocol Setting Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL.*1, *2

Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate is the
self-certificate of the machine.
Port Number Set the IPP over SSL default Port Number. The default port number is 443.*1
Value: 1-32767
NOTE
(Wired Network)
Raw Port -
Protocol Setting Select whether to receive documents using Raw Port.*1

Value: Off, On
(Wired Network)
8-33
Item Description
ThinPrint -
Protocol Setting Select whether to use ThinPrint.*1, *2

Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed only when the optional ThinPrint Option is activated.
Port Number Set the ThinPrint default Port Number. The default port number is 4000.
Value: 1-32767
NOTE
Thin Print over SSL To use the Thin Print over SSL protocol, set [Thin Print Over SSL] to [On].*1, *2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
• This function is displayed when [Protocol Setting] is set to [On].
• When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is the
self-certificate of the machine.
(Wired Network)
Enhanced WSD -
Protocol Setting Set whether to use our proprietary web services.*1

Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN, and Network FAX driver.
(Wired Network)
Enhanced WSD over SSL -
Protocol Setting Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.*1, *2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN and Network FAX drivers.
(Wired Network)
8-34
Item Description
eSCL -
Protocol Setting Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL.*1

Value: Off, On
(Wired Network)
eSCL over SSL -
Protocol Setting Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL over SSL.*1, *2
Value: Off, On
(Wired Network)
*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.

*2 Set "SSL" to [On] in Security Settings.
Security Settings (page 8-35)
IMPORTANT
Security Settings
Item Description
SSL Select whether or not to use SSL.
Value: Off, On
IPP Security Select the IPP security level. This setup is available when SSL is [On].
Value: IPP/IPP over SSL, IPPoverSSL only
HTTP Security Select the HTTP security level. This setup is available when SSL is [On].
Value: HTTP/HTTPS, HTTPS Only
SMTP Security Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the SMTP
server. This setup is available when SSL is [On].
Value: Off, SSL/TLS, STARTTLS
POP3 Security (User 1) Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the POP3
server. This setup is available when POP3 is [On].
POP3 Security (User 2)
Value: Off, SSL/TLS, STARTTLS
POP3 Security (User 3)
Ping
Item Description
Ping Checks if communication with the destination by entering the host name or IP address of the
destination is possible.
8-35
Restart Network
Item Description
Restart Network Restarts the network.
Primary Network (Client)

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Primary Network (Client)]
Item Description
Primary Network (Client) Specify the network to be used for the send function, the network authentication and
connecting to external address book.
Value: Wi-Fi, Wired Network
Interface Block Setting

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Interface Block Setting]
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts.
Item Description
USB Host This locks and protects the USB port (USB host).
Value: Unblock, Block
USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Device).
USB Storage This locks and protects the USB memory slot.
NOTE
This function is available when USB Host is set to [Unblock].
IMPORTANT
Security Level
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Security Level]
Item Description
Security Level Specify the security level.
Value
Low: This mode is used during maintenance. Do not use normally.
High: This is the security setting we recommend. Use this setting normally.
Very High: In addition to [High] setting, this setting disables the machine settings to be
changed from external command.
8-36
Restart
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Restart]
Item Description
Restart Restart the machine without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable
operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)
RAM Disk Setting

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [RAM Disk Setting]
Item Description
RAM Disk Setting A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set.
Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box.
Value
RAM Disk Setting: Off, On
RAM Disk Size: The setting range varies depending on the amount of memory installed
and the option memory usage setting.
NOTE
This function is displayed when optional memory is installed.
IMPORTANT
Optional Memory
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Memory]
Item Description
Optional Memory When optional memory is installed, select the memory allocation scheme based on the
application in which you are using the equipment.
Value: Printer Priority, Normal, Copy Priority
IMPORTANT
Optional Function
[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function]
Item Description
Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Optional Applications (page 11-6)
8-37
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]
Configures settings related to the date and time.
Item Description
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as
E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to
59), Second (00 to 59)
Setting Date and Time (page 2-23)
NOTE
If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an optional application, you will no
longer be able to use the optional application.
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.
Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If you select
a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.
Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the
default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
The time allowed to elapse before the panel is reset is set with the following:
Panel Reset Timer (page 8-38)
Panel Reset Timer If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset.
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Auto Panel Reset] is set to [On].
8-38
Item Description
Sleep Rules (models for Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually:
Europe) • Network
• Card Reader*1
• FAX
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When the machine has entered sleep mode with Energy Saver setting, the ID card cannot be
recognized.
Sleep Level (models except for Select the sleep level.

Europe) Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than Quick Recovery
mode.
Value: Quick Recovery, Energy Saver
Sleep Rules Select whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:
• Network
• Card Reader*1
• FAX
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When the machine has entered sleep mode with Energy Saver setting, the ID card cannot be
recognized.
Sleep Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep.

Value
For Europe: 1 to 60 minutes (1 minute increments)
Except for Europe: 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)
EnergySaver RecoveryLevel Select the method of recovery from energy saver.

Value:
Full Recovery: This mode enables the use of all functions immediately.
However, this mode saves less energy.
Normal Recovery: In this mode, you can select the method from the following:
enabling the use of all functions immediately or enabling the use of
desired functions only.
If you want to use all functions immediately, select the
[Energy Saver] key.
Power Saving Recovery: This mode enables the use of desired functions only. This
mode saves energy most effectively.
8-39
Item Description
Power Off Rule (models for Select whether or not the machine enters Power Off mode for the following function. Select
Europe) [On] to set the Power Off mode.
• Network
• FAX
• USB Cable
• USB Host
• RAM Disk
• Remote Diagnostics
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Even when any of the functions is set to [On], if [FAX] is set to [Off], the machine does not
enter Power Off Mode.
Even when [Network] or [USB Cable] is set to [Off], if the machine does not communicate with
the other devices, the machine will enter Power Off Mode.
Power Off Timer (models for Select whether to turn off the power automatically after a period of inactivity.
Europe) Value: 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 9 hours, 12 hours, 1 day,
2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 1 week
Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by
the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time
elapses.
Value: Off, On
Error Clear Timer If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically
clearing errors.
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Auto Error Clear] is set to [On].
Unusable Time Set a time period during which the machine will not print received faxes.
FAX Operation Guide.
Ping Timeout Set the time until timeout occurs when [Ping] is executed in "System/Network".
*1 Displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.
8-40
Adjustment/Maintenance
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance]
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
Item Description
Density Adjustment Adjust density.
Copy Adjust copy density.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Send/Box Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Contrast You can increase or decrease the overall contrast.
Copy Increases or decreases the overall contrast of copies.

Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)
Send/Box Increases or decreases the overall contrast when documents are sent or saved in a document
box.
Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)
Correcting Black Line Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the image, when
the document processor is used.
Value: Off, On
Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel.

Value: 1 (Darker), 2, 3, 4, 5 (Lighter)
Color Registration When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may
occur. Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to
resolve color drift.
Color Registration Procedure (page 10-29)
Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. It takes about 2 minutes. The time
required may vary depending on the operating environment and this process may take time.
Drum Refresh (page 10-34)
NOTE
Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is
done.
Calibration Adjust color drift or hue of printed image in the most appropriate color.
Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical white lines from the printout.
Laser Scanner Cleaning (page 10-34)
Service Setting Settings for machine maintenance and inspection. This menu is primarily used by service
technicians to perform maintenance.
8-41
9 User Authentication and
Accounting (User Login,
Job Accounting)
Overview of User Login Administration .............................................................................................................. 9-2
Managing the Job Account from PC ........................................................................................................ 9-2
Enabling User Login Administration ................................................................................................................... 9-3
Setting User Login Administration ...................................................................................................................... 9-4
Authentication Security ............................................................................................................................ 9-4
Adding a User (Local User List) ............................................................................................................... 9-5
Changing User Properties ....................................................................................................................... 9-8
User Login Administration for Printing .................................................................................................... 9-11
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN ........................................................................................... 9-12
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA ............................................................................................... 9-13
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC .................................................................................. 9-14
Group Authorization Settings ................................................................................................................. 9-15
Guest Authorization Set. ........................................................................................................................ 9-18
Obtain NW User Property ...................................................................................................................... 9-21
Simple Login Settings ............................................................................................................................ 9-23
ID Card Settings .................................................................................................................................... 9-25
PIN Login Settings ................................................................................................................................. 9-26
Using User Login Administration ...................................................................................................................... 9-27
Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-27
Overview of Job Accounting ............................................................................................................................ 9-28
To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ..................................................... 9-28
Enabling Job Accounting ................................................................................................................................. 9-29
Job Accounting Access .......................................................................................................................... 9-29
Setting an Account ........................................................................................................................................... 9-30
Adding an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-30
Restricting the Use of the Machine ........................................................................................................ 9-31
Editing an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-32
Deleting an Account ............................................................................................................................... 9-33
Job Accounting for Printing .................................................................................................................... 9-34
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN ................................................................................................. 9-35
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ...................................................................................................... 9-36
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer ................................................................... 9-37
Configuring Job Accounting ............................................................................................................................. 9-38
Default Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 9-38
Counting the Number of Pages Printed ................................................................................................. 9-39
Print Accounting Report ......................................................................................................................... 9-40
Using Job Accounting ...................................................................................................................................... 9-41
Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-41
Unknown User Settings ................................................................................................................................... 9-42
Unknown ID Job .................................................................................................................................... 9-42
Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown ..................................................................... 9-43
9-1
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration
Overview of User Login Administration

User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login user
name and password for user authentication to login.
1 Enable User Login 2 Set the user 3 Enter the login user name and
Administration (page 9-5) password and execute the job
(page 9-3) (page 9-27)
UserA
Access are in three levels - "User", "Administrator", and "Machine Administrator". The security levels can be modified
only by the "Machine Administrator".
Managing the Job Account from PC

In addition to the above settings, the following are necessary to manage the job account from PC.
To Manage the Users to Print from PCs

Printer driver settings are necessary to manage the users that print on the machine from PCs.
1 Set the User Login Administration 2 Print

on the printer driver (page 9-11)
User A
User B
User C
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning

TWAIN driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use TWAIN for scanning.
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-12)
Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning

WIA driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use WIA for scanning.
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA (page 9-13)
Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC

FAX driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC (page 9-14)
9-2
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration
Enabling User Login Administration

This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:
Item Descriptions
Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the
machine.
Network Authentication User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored
in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page.

1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login
password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.
2 [User Login Setting] > [User Login]

1 Select [Local Authentication] or [Network Authentication].
Select [Off] to disable user login administration.
If you select [Network Authentication], enter the host name (64 characters or less) and domain
name (256 characters or less) for the Authentication Server. Select [NTLM], [Kerberos] or [Ext.] as
the server type.
When selecting [Ext.] as the server type, enter the port number.
NOTE
• Selecting [Domain] displays the domain registration list.
• Enter the domain name. Up to 10 domain names can be registered.
2 "Do you want to add a new function to the home screen?" screen appears.To display a new
function on the Home screen, select [Yes] and specify the position in which you want to
display the icon of registered function.
Available Functions to Display on Desktop (page 2-14)
NOTE
If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.
• Network Authentication setting of the machine
• User property of the Authentication Server
• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server
If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator
registered in the local user list and correct the settings.
9-3
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Setting User Login Administration

This registers, alters and deletes users and configures the settings for User Login Administration.
Authentication Security
If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.
User Account Lockout Setting

You can prohibit the use of a user account if an incorrect password is entered repeatedly to login with that account.

NOTE
2 [User Login Setting] > [User Account Lockout Settings]

The following settings can be selected.
Item Descriptions
Lockout Select whether or not account lockout policy is enabled.
Value: Off, On
Lockout Policy Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account lockout is
applied.
Value
Number of Retries until Locked:
Specify how many login retries are allowed until
the account is locked out.
(1 to 10 times)
Lockout Duration: Specify how long the account is to be locked out
until it is unlocked.
(1 to 60 minutes)
Lockout Target Specify the extent to which the account lockout
is applied. You can select from [All] or [Remote
Login Only]. Remote Login Only locks out all
operations from outside the operation panel.
Locked out Users List Displays a list of locked out users. You can unlock a user by selecting the
user in the list, and selecting [Unlock].
NOTE
This function is displayed when account lockout policy is enabled.
9-4
Adding a User (Local User List)

You can add up to 20 users (including the default login user name).
NOTE
By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored.
Each user's properties are:
Machine Administrator
User Name: DeviceAdmin
Access Level: Machine Administrator
Administrator
User Name: Admin
Access Level: Administrator
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your
security.

NOTE
2 [User Login Setting] > [Local User List] > [ ]
9-5
2 Enter the user information.

Select [Next].
The table below explains the user information to be registered.
Item Descriptions
User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Login User Name Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same login user
name cannot be registered.
Access Level Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
3 Check the user information.

Change or add information as needed.
Item Descriptions
User Name*1 Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Login User Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same login user
Name*1 name cannot be registered.
Login Password Enter the password to login (up to 64 characters). Reenter the same password
for confirmation and select the [OK] key.
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her
account name, can login without entering the account ID.
NOTE
Select [Menu] > [Search (Name)] or [Search (ID)] to search by account name
or account ID.
Select [Menu] > [Sort (Name)] or [Sort (ID)] to sort the account list.
Access Level*1 Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.
ID Card Register ID card information.

Information Place the ID card on the ID card reader, and select [Read].
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is
activated.
*1 Mandatory at user registration.
NOTE
9-6
4 Select [Save].
A new user is added on the local user list.
NOTE
If simple login is enabled, a confirmation screen appears when new registration is finished
asking if you will configure simple login settings. To configure simple login settings, select
[Yes]. If you select [No], you will return to the user list screen.
For the procedure for configuring simple login settings, refer to the following:
Simple Login Settings (page 9-23)
9-7
Changing User Properties

Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user access privilege.
NOTE
To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine administrator authority.
You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user.
For a user with administrator rights who logs in

User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items, which can be added, are all able to be changed.

NOTE
2 [User Login Setting] > [Local User List]
9-8
2 Change the user properties.

Changing user properties
1 Select [ ] for the user to edit.

User Login S... - Local User List
Admin Admin
DeviceAdmin 5000
1/1
User A User A
Menu End
NOTE
• To sort the user list, select [Menu] > [Sort (User Name)] and [Sort (Login User
Name)].
• To search by name or login user name, select [Menu] > [Search (User Name)] or
[Search (Login User Name)].
2 Refer to step 3 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-5)
3 [Save] > [Yes]

The user information is changed.
Deleting a user
1 Select the user to delete.
2 [ ] > [Yes]
The selected user will be deleted.
NOTE
The default user with machine administrator rights cannot be deleted.
9-9
To change the user information of logged in user (User Property)

These users can partially change their own user properties including user name, login password, and Simple Login.
Although "Login User Name", "Access Level", or "Account Name" cannot be changed, the users can check the present
status.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Property]
2 Change the user properties.

1 Refer to step 3 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.
Item Description
User Name Changes the name shown on the user list. Up to 32 characters can be
entered.
Login User Name Displays the login user name that is entered at login.
Login Password Changes the password that is entered at login. Up to 64 characters

can be entered.
Access Level Displays the user's access level.
Account Name Displays the account where the user belongs.
Job Accounting Displays the usage restriction that is set for the logged in user.
NOTE
[Job Accounting] shows the account name set for the logged in user
and the usage restrictions that are set for that account.
This function appears when job accounting is set to [On]. For
information on job accounting, refer to the following:
Enabling Job Accounting (page 9-29)
ID Card Information Displays the ID card information of the logged in user.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is
activated.
This function does not appear when the server type is set to [Ext.] in
Network Authentication, and logged in with the user account
certificated in the server specified as the [Ext.] server type.
Simple Login When simple login is enabled, changes associated settings.
NOTE
This function does not appear when Simple Login is set to [Off] or the
user is not registered in Simple Login.
2 Select [Save].
The user information is changed.
9-10
User Login Administration for Printing

It is possible to manage the users that print on this machine from a PC.
Setting Printer Driver

To manage the users that print on this machine from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the printer driver.
Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1 Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices
and Printers].
NOTE
Printers].
the printer driver.
3 Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

1 Select [User Login] on the [User Login] tab.
2 Set the User Login Administration.

[Use specific name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use
the same User login for every print job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to
type the name and password for each print job.
[Prompt for name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed
when attempting a printing. The user name and password must be entered each time a
printing is attempted.
[Prompt for name and validate]: A screen for entering the user name and password will
be displayed when attempting a printing. The user name and password stored in the Login
user name list needs to be entered. The user name and password must be entered each
time a printing is attempted.
[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for login user name]: When printing, the
Windows user name is searched in the "Login user names" and printing is possible if the
name is registered. If the name is not registered, the printing will be canceled for users with
only user authority. If the user has administrator privileges, the screen to enter the user
name and password will appear.
9-11
3 Click [OK].
NOTE
For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN

It is possible to manage the users that scan using TWAIN.

To manage the users that scan using TWAIN, the following settings are necessary in the TWAIN driver. Instructions are
based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1 Select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Click
[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver Setting screen appears.
NOTE
2 Select the machine, and click [Edit].

1 Click [User Authentication Settings].
2 Select the checkbox beside [Authentication], and enter Login User Name and Password.
3 Click [OK].
9-12
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA

It is possible to manage the users that scan using WIA.
Setting WIA Driver

To manage the users that scan using WIA, the following settings are necessary in the WIA driver. Instructions are based
on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1 Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click [View scanners
and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
NOTE
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].
1
2

1 Select the checkbox beside [Authentication] on the [Settings] tab, and enter Login User
Name and Password.
1 2
2 Click [OK].
9-13
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC

It is possible to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.
Setting FAX Driver

To manage the users that send faxes from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the FAX driver. Instructions are
based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

and Printers].
NOTE
Printers].
the printer driver.
3 Click [FAX TX Setting] on the [Printing Preferences] window.

1 Select [User Login] on the [Authentication] tab.
2 Set the User Login Administration.

[Use Specific Login User Name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and
password to use the same User login for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user
does not have to type the name and password for each FAX job.
[Prompt for Login User Name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be
displayed when attempting a transmission. The user name and password must be entered
each time a transmission is attempted.
3 Click [OK].
9-14
Group Authorization Settings

Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.
NOTE
To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method in
"Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Settings".
Group Authorization

NOTE
2 [User Login Setting] > [Group Authorization Set.] > [Group Authorization]
2 Select [On].
9-15
Group List (Up to 20)

Register the groups that are restricted the machine usage. Other users and groups belong to "Others".
The table below explains the group information to be registered.
Item Descriptions
Group ID*1 Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and 4294967295).
Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).
Access Level Select [Administrator] or [User] for group access privileges.
Printer Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer.
Printer (Full Color) Select whether or not to reject usage of color print functions for the printer.
Copy Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.
Copy (Full Color) Select whether or not to reject usage of only full-color print functions for copies.
Duplex Restriction Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.
Combine Restrict. Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
EcoPrint Restriction Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
Send Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.
FAX Transmission Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.
Storing in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes.
Storing in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory.
*1 For "Group ID", set the PrimaryGroupID shown in the user attributes that are displayed using ADSIEdit of Windows Server. In
Windows Server 2003, ADSIEdit is a support tool that is included on the installation DVD of the Windows Server OS (in the
\SUPPORT\TOOLS folder). In Windows Server 2008 and later, ADSIEdit is provided as a standard function.

NOTE
2 [User Login Setting] > [Group Authorization] > [Group List] > [ ]

Group Authorization Set. - Group List
Others
1/1
Menu End
9-16

1 Enter the group ID > [Next]
2 Enter the group name > [Next]
NOTE
3 Select the group access privileges > [Next]
3 Register the group.

Select [Save].
A new group is added on the group list.
9-17
Guest Authorization Set.

When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine are
allowed to use.
NOTE
To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".
Enabling Guest Authorization

NOTE
2 [User Login Setting] > [Guest Authorization Set.] > [Guest Authorization]
2 Select [On].
NOTE
If the guest authorization setting is enabled, the [Authentication/Logout] key must be
selected when logging in.
In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to use
a different function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings in the
guest properties.
9-18
Configuring Guest Property

Register guest user information and functions that are restricted.
Item Descriptions
The default setting is "Guest User".
Access Level The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs.

If the user does not belong to any account, select [Other].
Authorization Rules Set usage authority for each user.

The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.
Printer:
Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited.
Printer (Full Color):
Select whether or not use of the print function (color) of the printer is prohibited.
Copy:
Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.
Copy (Full Color):
Select whether or not use of the copy print function (full color) is prohibited.
Duplex Restriction:
Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.
Combine Restrict.:
Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
EcoPrint Restriction:
Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
Send:
Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.
FAX TX Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.
Storing in Box:
Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.
Storing in Memory:
Select whether or not use of the removable memory store function is prohibited.

NOTE
2 [User Login Setting] > [Guest Authorization Set.] > [Guest Property]
9-19

Check the settings and change or add information as needed.
3 Register the group.

Select [Save].
9-20
Obtain NW User Property

Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. The user name obtained with this
setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and the header of E-mail.
NOTE
To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the
authentication method in "Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Settings".
The table below explains the required information to be registered.
Item Descriptions
Server Name*1 Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 64 characters). If a server name is not
entered, user information will be acquired from the server set for Network Authentication.
Port Port number for LDAP server. The default port number is 389.
Name 1*2 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server (up to
32 characters).
Name 2*3 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server (up to
32 characters).
Authentic at Type*4 Set the authentication method. Select [Simple] or [SASL]. After changing the setting, restart the
system or turn the power off and then on.
Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds (from 5 to 255 seconds).
*1 If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be the same as the server name entered in the network
authentication.
*2 If using Active Directory of Windows, displayName of Attribute may be used as "Name 1".
*3 "Name 2" can be left out. When you assign displayName in "Name 1" and department in "Name 2", and if the value of
displayName is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is "Sales" in Active Directory of Windows, the user name appears as
"Mike Smith Sales".
*4 Appears when the server type is set to "Kerberos" in "Network Authentication".

NOTE
2 [User Login Setting] > [Obtain NW User Property] > [On]
9-21

1 [Server Name] > Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address > [OK]
2 [Port] > Enter the LDAP port number > [OK]
3 [Name 1] > Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed > [OK]
4 Similar to steps 3, set [Name 2].
5 If you set the server type to "Kerberos", select [Authentication Type] and set the
authentication method.
6 Select [Search Timeout] to set the amount of time to wait before time-out.
7 Select [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter the time > [OK] > [OK]
9-22
Simple Login Settings

The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name. Users must be registered in advance to
use this functionality.
NOTE
• For user registration, refer to the following:
• To use Simple Login, User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".
• When the guest authorization setting is enabled, the Simple Login screen is not displayed.
Enabling Simple Login

NOTE
2 [User Login Setting] > [Simple Login Settings] > [Simple Login]
2 Select [On] or [Off].
Simple Login Setup

You can add up to 20 users.

NOTE
2 [User Login Setting] > [Simple Login Settings] > [Simple Login Setup]

1 Select the key to which you want to register a user.
9-23
2 Select [ ].
Simple login settings - Simple Login Setup

1/3
Menu End
3 To specify the user from local users, select [Local User]. To specify from network users,
select [Network User].
The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.
Specifying the user from local users

Select the user to be set for simple login.
NOTE
• To search by name or login user name, select [Menu] > [Search (Name)] or [Search
(Login User Name)].
• To sort the user list, select [Menu] > [Sort (Name)] and [Sort (Login User Name)].
Specifying the user from network users

Add - Network User
Login User Name

Keyboard
Login Password
Keyboard
Cancel < Back Next >
Select [Keyboard] for "Login User Name" and "Login Password", enter the information of the
user to be registered, and select [OK].
If you are specifying a user for whom a domain is set in network authentication, select the
"Domain" and select the domain where the user is registered.
Select [Next].
NOTE
4 Enter the user name to be displayed, and select [OK].
NOTE
5 [Password Login] > [On] or [Off] > [Icon]
6 Select the user icon to be displayed and select [OK].
3 Register the user.

Select [Save].
9-24
ID Card Settings
If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type.
NOTE
This functions appears when the Card Authentication Kit is activated.

NOTE
2 [User Login Setting] > [ID Card Settings]

The following settings can be selected.
Item Descriptions
Keyboard Login When ID card authentication is enabled, select whether or not login by
keyboard is allowed.
Value: Permit, Prohibit
Additional Select whether or not to require password entry after authenticating by ID

Authentication*1 card.
Value: Off, Use Password, Use PIN*2
*1 This function does not appear when the server type is set to [NTLM] or [Kerberos] in "Network
Authentication".
*2 This function appears when the server type is set to [Ext.] in Network Authentication.
9-25
PIN Login Settings
NOTE
This setting is only displayed when [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method and the
server type is set to [Ext.] in "Network Authentication".

NOTE
2 Select [PIN Login].
2 Configure the settings

1 Select [Off] or [On].
2 Select [OK].
9-26
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using User Login Administration
Using User Login Administration

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.
Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, the login user name and login password entry screen appears each time you use
this machine.
Login
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following:
Login (page 2-21)
Logout
When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user name and login
password entry screen.
9-27
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting
Overview of Job Accounting

Job accounting manages the copy/print/scan/FAX count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each
account.
1 Enable job 2 Setting an 3 Enter the assigned account 4 Count the number of pages
accounting. (page account. (page ID when performing the copied, printed, scanned
9-29) 9-30) job. (page 9-27) and faxed.
A: 00000001
100 400 200
To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs

Printed from a PC
To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need to configure settings by using the
printer driver on the PC.
1 Set Job Accounting for the PC on 2 Execute printing. 3 Count the number of
the network by using the printer pages printed.
driver. (page 9-34)
A: 00000001
100 400 200

B: 00000002
C: 00000003
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN

To manage the scan job account by using TWAIN, you need to configure the TWAIN driver settings on the computer
connected to the machine.
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-35)
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA

To manage the scan job account by using WIA, you need to configure the WIA driver settings on the computer
connected to the machine.
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA (page 9-36)
Managing the FAX Job Transmitted from a PC

To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the PC, you need to configure the settings by using the FAX Driver
on the PC.
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer (page 9-37)
9-28
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting
Enabling Job Accounting

NOTE
2 [Job Accounting Settings] > [Job Accounting]
2 Select [On].
NOTE
• To disable job accounting, select [Off].
• When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed
and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the
Account ID.
Job Accounting Access

NOTE
2 [Job Accounting Settings] > [Job Accounting Access]

Select [Local] or [Network].
9-29
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account
Setting an Account
You can add, change and delete an account and set the restriction for each account.
Adding an Account
Up to 20 individual accounts can be added. The following entries are required.
Item Descriptions
Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).
Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).
Restriction This prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load.

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-31)

NOTE
2 [Job Accounting Settings] > [Accounting List] > [ ]
2 Enter the account information.

1 Enter the account name > [Next]
NOTE
2 Enter the account ID > [Next]
NOTE
Any "Account ID" that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account
ID.
3 Activate or deactivate restriction.

4 Select [Save].
A new account is added on the Account List.
9-30
Restricting the Use of the Machine

This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.
The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether "Individual" or "Total" is selected for "Copy/Print Count".
Copy/Print Count (page 9-38)
Restriction Items
"Individual" selected for Copy/Printer Count"Split" selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item Descriptions
Copy (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for copying.
Copy (Full Color) Limits the number of pages used for full-color copying.
Printer (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for printing.
Printer (Full Color) Limits the number of pages used for color printing.
Scan (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX Transmission Limits the number of sheets sent by fax.
"Total" selected for Copy/Printer Count
Item Descriptions
Print (Total) Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.
Print (Full Color) Limits the number of pages used for full-color printing.
Scan (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX Transmission Limits the number of sheets sent by fax.
Applying Restriction
Restriction can be applied in the following modes:
Item Descriptions
Off No restriction is applied.
Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
Reject Usage Restriction is applied.
9-31
Editing an Account

NOTE
2 [Job Accounting Settings] > [Accounting List]
2 Edit an account.
1 Select [ ] for the account name you wish to edit.

Job Accounti... - Accounting List
AAA 00000001
1/1
Menu End
NOTE
• To search by name or login user name, select [Menu] > [Search (Name)] or [Search
(ID)].
• To sort the user list, select [Menu] > [Sort (Name)] and [Sort (ID)].
2 Select the account information to be changed and change the account information.
3 [Save] > [Yes]

The account information is changed.
9-32
Deleting an Account

NOTE
2 [Job Accounting Settings] > [Accounting List]
2 Delete an account.
1 Select the account name you wish to delete.
2 [ ] > [Yes]
The account is deleted.
9-33
Job Accounting for Printing

The number of jobs to be printed from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.
Setting Printer Driver

To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need configure the following settings by
using the printer driver on the PC. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

and Printers].
NOTE
Printers].
the printer driver.
3 Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

1 Select [Job accounting] on the [Job Accounting] tab.
2 Set the Account ID.

[Use specific account ID]: Enter the Account ID. Printing will be performed using the
entered Account ID. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID
for each print job.
[Prompt for account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when
attempting a printing. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.
[Prompt for account ID and validate]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be
displayed when attempting a printing. The Account ID stored in the Account ID list needs to
be entered. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.
[Display account ID list]: The Account ID list is displayed when printing. The Account ID
to be used needs to be selected from the list.
[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for account ID]: When printing, the Windows
user name is searched in the "Login user names" and printing is possible if the name is
registered. If the name is not registered, the printing will be canceled for users with only
user authority. If the user has administrator privileges, the screen to enter the user name
and password will appear.
9-34
3 Click [OK].
NOTE
For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN

The number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN can be managed by Job Accounting.

To manage the number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN, you need to configure the following settings by using the
TWAIN Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1 Select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Click
[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver Setting screen appears.
NOTE
2 Select the machine, click [Edit].

1 Click [User Authentication Settings].
2 Select the checkbox beside [Account], and enter the account ID.
3 Click [OK].
9-35
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA

The number of jobs scanned by using WIA can be managed by Job Accounting.
Setting WIA Driver

To manage the number of jobs scanned by using WIA, you need to configure the following settings by using the WIA
Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1 Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click [View scanners
and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
NOTE
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].
1
2
2 Configure WIA Driver.

1 Select the checkbox beside [Account ID] on the [Settings] tab, and enter the Account ID.
2 Click [OK].
9-36
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a

Computer
The number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.
Setting FAX Driver

To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer, you need to configure the following settings by using
the FAX Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

and Printers].
NOTE
Printers].
2 Right click the name of the machine to be used as the FAX Driver and select
[Printing preferences] from the resulting pull-down menu.
3 Click [FAX TX Setting] in the [Printing Preferences] window.

1 Select [Job Accounting] on the [Authentication] tab.
2 Set the Job Accounting.

[Use Specific Account ID]: This option can be used to specify an account ID to use the
same Account ID for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to
enter the Account ID for each FAX job.
[Prompt for Account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when
attempting a transmission. The Account ID must be entered each time a transmission is
attempted.
3 Click [OK].
9-37
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Configuring Job Accounting

Default Setting
Set the defaults for job accounting. To configure the settings, select the item in Default Setting and select the setting
item.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > [Job Accounting Settings] > [Default Setting]
Item Description
Apply Limit This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction.
The table below describes the action taken.
Value
Immediately: Job stops when the counter reaches its limit. The next job will be
prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.
Subsequently: Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be
rejected.
Alert Only: Job continues while displaying an alert message.
Copy/Print Count You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or
each of copying and printing individually (Split). The selection may influence restriction on the
count and count method.
Value: Total, Individual
Print Accounting Report (page 9-40)
Default Counter Limit When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets
used. You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999.
The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Individual] or [Total] is selected for
[Copy/Print Count].
Copy/Print Count (page 9-38)
[Individual] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Copy (Total) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for copying.
Copy (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color copying.
Printer (Total) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for printing.
Printer (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for color printing.
Scan (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).
FAX Transmission Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes.
[Total] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Print (Total) Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.
Print (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color printing.
Scan (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).
FAX Transmission Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes.
9-38
Counting the Number of Pages Printed

This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A
new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > [Job Accounting Settings] >
[Total Accounting] or [Each Job Account]
Total Accounting
This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.
Each Job Account

This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. When checking Each Job
Accounting, select the account for which you want to check the count.
Types of the counts are as follows.
Item Descriptions
Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages used. You can
also use [FAX], [by Duplex] and [by Combine] to check the number of pages used.
Copy (B & W) Displays the number of pages used for black and white copying.
Copy (Full Color) Displays the number of pages used for full-color copying.
Copy (Total) Displays the number of pages copied.
Printer (B & W) Displays the number of pages used for black and white printing.
Printer (Full Color) Displays the number of pages used for color printing.
Printer (Total) Displays the number of pages printed.
Copy/Printer (B/W) Displays the total number of pages used for black-and-white copying and printing.
Copy/Print. (Color) Displays the total number of pages used for full-color copying and printing.
Copy/Print. (Total) Displays the total number of pages used for copying and printing.
FAX Displays the number of pages received.
Total Displays the total number of pages used.
by Duplex Displays the number of pages printed in [1-sided] mode, [2-sided] mode, and the total pages
in both modes.
by Combine Displays the number of pages printed in [None] (no Combine) mode, [2 in 1] mode, [4 in 1]
mode, and the total pages in both modes.
Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing and other functions, as well as the
total number of pages scanned.
FAX TX Pages Displays the number of pages faxed.
FAX TX Time Displays the total duration of FAX transmissions.
Counter Reset Resets the counter.

Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
9-39
Print Accounting Report

The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.
When "Individual" is selected for Managing the Copy/Printer Count.
ACCOUNT. REPORT
1 Prepare paper.
Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > [Job Accounting Settings]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password
and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory
default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
3 Print the report.

[Print Accounting Report] > [Yes]
Accounting report is printed.
9-40
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using Job Accounting
Using Job Accounting

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.
Login/Logout
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.
Login
When the screen for entry of account codes on the machine appears, perform the following.
1 Enter the account ID using the numeric keys > [Login]
NOTE
• If you entered a wrong character, select the [Clear] key and enter the account ID again.
• If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound and
login will fail. Enter the correct account ID.
• By selecting [Check Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the
number of pages scanned.
When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears
If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password
appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. If the user has already registered the
account information, the account ID entry would be skipped.
2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.
Logout
When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the account ID entry screen.
9-41
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings
Unknown User Settings

Unknown ID Job
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID. If the User
Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown.
The setting items are as follows.
Item Descriptions
Permit The job is permitted to be printed.
Reject The job is rejected (not printed).

NOTE
2 [Unknown User Settings] > [Unknown ID Job]

Select [Permit] or [Reject].
9-42
Registering Information for a User whose ID is

Unknown
If you register user information for a user whose ID is unknown, you can check information on the Job Status or Job
History screens. In addition, you can restrict available functions.
NOTE
This functions appears when [Unknown ID Job] is set to [Permit].
Unknown ID Job (page 9-42)

NOTE
2 [Unknown User Settings] > [User Property]
9-43

Item Descriptions
NOTE
This is displayed when user login administration is enabled.
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her
account name, can login without entering the account ID.
NOTE
• Select [Menu] > [Search (Name)] or [Search (ID)] to search by account
name or account ID.
• Select [Menu] > [Sort (Name)] or [Sort (ID)] to sort the account list.
• This is displayed when job accounting is enabled.
Authorization Set usage authority for each user.

Rules The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.
Printer:
Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited.
Printer (Full Color):
Select whether or not use of the print function (color) of the printer is
prohibited.
9-44
10 Troubleshooting
Regular Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................... 10-2
Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................. 10-2
Cleaning Glass Platen ........................................................................................................................... 10-2
Cleaning Slit Grass ................................................................................................................................ 10-3
Cleaning Paper Transfer Unit ................................................................................................................ 10-4
Toner Container Replacement ............................................................................................................... 10-5
Loading Paper ....................................................................................................................................... 10-8
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................... 10-9
Solving Malfunctions .............................................................................................................................. 10-9
Machine Operation Trouble ................................................................................................................... 10-9
Printed Image Trouble ......................................................................................................................... 10-12
Color printing trouble ........................................................................................................................... 10-15
Responding to Messages .................................................................................................................... 10-16
Adjustment/Maintenance ............................................................................................................................... 10-29
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................................................. 10-29
Color Registration Procedure .............................................................................................................. 10-29
Drum Refresh ...................................................................................................................................... 10-34
Calibration ............................................................................................................................................ 10-34
Laser Scanner Cleaning ...................................................................................................................... 10-34
Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................................................... 10-35
Jam Location Indicators ....................................................................................................................... 10-35
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 ........................................................................................... 10-36
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2 ........................................................................................... 10-37
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray ......................................................................... 10-39
Remove any jammed paper in Rear Cover 1 ....................................................................................... 10-42
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor .................................................................... 10-45
10-1
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Regular Maintenance
Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum printing quality.
CAUTION
For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
Cleaning Glass Platen

Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild
detergent.
IMPORTANT
Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
10-2
Cleaning Slit Grass

When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the dry cloth.
IMPORTANT
Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.
NOTE
Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.
10-3
Cleaning Paper Transfer Unit

The paper transfer unit should be cleaned each time the toner container is replaced. To maintain optimum print quality, it
is also recommended that the inside of the machine be cleaned once a month as well as when the toner container is
replaced.
Print problems such as soiling of the reverse side of printed pages may occur if the paper transfer unit becomes dirty.
CAUTION
Some parts are very hot inside the machine. Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury.
Transfer Belt
Registration Roller(Metal)
Transfer Roller
Paper Ramp
Wipe away the paper dust on the registration roller and the paper ramp using the cloth.
IMPORTANT
Be careful not to touch the transfer roller and transfer belt during cleaning as this
may adversely affect print quality.
10-4
Toner Container Replacement

When toner is empty, the following message will be displayed, replace the toner.
"Toner [C][M][Y][K] are empty."
When toner runs low, the following message will be displayed. Make sure you have a new toner container available for
replacement.
"Toner is low. [C][M][Y][K] (Replace when empty.)"
Frequency of Toner Container Replacement

The life of the toner containers depends on the amount of toner required to accomplish your printing jobs. According to
ISO/IEC 19798 and EcoPrint switched off the toner container can print as follows (A4/Letter paper is assumed):
Toner Color Life of the Toner Container (Printable pages)

Black 4,000 images
Cyan 3,000 images
Magenta 3,000 images
Yellow 3,000 images
NOTE
• The average number of images that can be printed with each of the toner containers provided with the machine is
1,200 images.
• To maintain quality, we recommend using genuine own brand toner containers, which must pass numerous quality
inspections.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Replacing the Toner Container

Installation procedures of the toner container is same for every color. Here, we'll explain the yellow toner container, as
an example.
1 Open the right cover.
10-5
2 Unlock the toner container.
3 Remove the toner container.
4 Put used toner containers into the plastic waste bag.
10-6
5 Remove the new toner container from the box.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the points shown below.
6 Shake the toner container.
5~6
7 Install the toner container.
10-7
8 Close the right cover.
NOTE
• If the right cover does not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly.
• Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be
recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
Loading Paper
When Cassette # runs out of paper, the following messages will be displayed.
"Add the following paper in cassette #." (# is a cassette number)
"Add the following paper in the multipurpose tray."
Loading Paper (page 3-2)
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-5)
NOTE
If [Show Paper Setup Message] is set to [On], the confirmation screen for the paper setting will be displayed when a
new paper is set. If a paper is changed, select [Change] and then change the settings of the paper.
10-8
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following
pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
NOTE
When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.
To check the serial number, refer to the following:
Display for Device Information (page 2-16)
Machine Operation Trouble (page 10-9)
Machine Operation Trouble

When the following machine operation troubles occur, implement appropriate procedures.
Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
The screen does not Check the power cord. Connect both ends of the power cord page 2-9
respond when the power securely.
switch is turned on.
Pressing the [Start] key Is there a message on the screen? Determine the appropriate response to page 10-16
does not produce copies. the message and respond accordingly.
Is the machine in Sleep mode? Select the [Energy Saver] key. page 2-32
Blank sheets are ejected. Are the originals loaded correctly? When placing originals on the platen, page 5-2
place them face-down and align them
with the original size indicator plates.
When placing originals in the document page 5-3

processor, place them face-up.
― Check that the settings of the ―

application software.
Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4
― Turn the orientation 180 degrees around page 3-4

in which the paper is positioned.
Is the paper of the supported type? Is it Remove the paper, turn it over, and page 3-4
in good condition? reload it.
Is the paper curled, folded or wrinkled? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4
Are there any loose scraps or jammed Remove any jammed paper. page 10-35
paper in the machine?
2 or more sheets are ― Load the paper correctly. page 3-2

overlaps when ejected.
(multi feed)
10-9
Reference
Page
Printouts are wrinkled. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4
― Turn the orientation 180 degrees around page 3-2

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4
Printouts are curled. ― Turn the paper over in the cassette, or page 3-2
turn the orientation 180 degrees around
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4
Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. ―
Is the machine powered on? Turn on the power switch. page 2-10
Are the USB cable and network cable Connect the correct USB cable and page 2-8
connected? network cable securely.
Is the print job paused? Resume printing. page 7-10
Cannot print with USB Is the USB host blocked? Select [Unblock] in the USB host page 8-36
memory. settings.
USB memory not
― Check that the USB memory is securely ―
recognized.
plugged into the machine.
While "Auto-IP" is set to Is a value other than "0.0.0.0" entered Enter "0.0.0.0" for the IP address of page 2-24
[On], the IP address is not for the IP address of TCP/IP(v4)? TCP/IP(v4).
assigned automatically.
10-10
Reference
Page
Cannot send via SMB. Is the network cable connected? Connect the correct network cable page 2-8
securely.
Have the network settings for the Configure the TCP/IP settings properly. page 8-29
equipment been configured properly?
Have the folder sharing settings been Check sharing settings and access page 3-12
configured properly? privileges under the folder properties.
Has the SMB protocol been set to [On]? Set the SMB protocol setting to [On]. page 8-30
Has [Host Name] been entered Check the name of the computer to page 5-20
properly? *1 which data is being sent.
Has [Path] been entered properly? Check the share name for the shared page 5-20
folder.
Has [Login User Name] been entered Check the domain name and login user page 5-20
properly? *1 *2 name.
Has the same domain name been used for Delete the domain name and backslash page 5-20
[Host Name] and [Login User Name]? ("/") from [Login User Name].
Has [Login Password] been entered Check the login password. page 5-20
properly?
Have exceptions for Windows Firewall Configure exceptions for Windows page 3-15
been configured properly? Firewall properly.
Do the time settings for the equipment, Set the equipment, domain server, and ―
domain server, and data destination data destination computer to the same
computer differ? time.
Is the screen displaying Send error? Refer to Responding to Send Error. page 10-26
Cannot send via the e-mail. Is the E-mail send size limit set in the Check the limit value is entered to page 2-58
SMTP server registered on the "E-mail Size Limit" of [E-mail] setting in
machine? Embedded Web Server RX and change
the value as necessary.
The machine is emitting Check the room temperature to see if it Depending on the printing environment ―
steam in the area around the is low, or if damp paper was used. and the paper's condition, the heat
paper ejection slot. generated during printing will cause the
moisture in the paper to evaporate, and
the steam emitted may look like smoke.
This is not a problem, and you can
continue printing. If the steam concerns
you, raise the room temperature, or
replace the paper with a newer, dryer
paper.
*1 You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).
*2 You can also enter login user names in the following formats:
Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)
User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)
10-11
Printed Image Trouble

When the following printed image trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures.
Reference
Page
Printed images are totally Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2
too light.
Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-11
page 8-41
Is the toner distributed evenly within the Shake the toner container from side to page 10-5
toner container? side several times.
Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable [EcoPrint] mode. page 8-16
― Run [Calibration]. page 10-34
― Run [Drum Refresh]. page 10-34
― Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. page 10-34
― Select the [System Menu/Counter] key ―

> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >
[Service Setting] > [DEV-CLN], and
then select [OK].
White background parts of Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-11
the image appear to have a page 8-41
slight overall coloration.
― Run [Drum Refresh] page 10-34

[Service Setting] > [MC] and increase
the adjustment value. Increase the
adjustment value 1 level at a time from
the current value. If there is no
improvement after the value is
increased by 1 level, increase by 1 level
again. If there is still no improvement,
return the setting to the original value.
Copies have a moire pattern Is the original a printed photograph? Set the original image to [Photo]. page 6-19
(dots grouped together in
patterns and not aligned ― When making copies page 6-22
uniformly). Set [Sharpness] to a value from [-1] to [-3].
― When making copies page 8-20

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key page 8-20
> [Copy] > [DP Read Action] or [Platen
Scan Act.], and set to [Quality
Priority].
Texts are not clearly printed. Did you choose appropriate image Select appropriate image quality. page 6-19
quality for the original?

Set [Sharpness] to a value from [+1] to
[+3].
10-12
Reference
Page
Black or colored points Is the original holder or the glass platen Clean the original holder or the glass page 10-2
appear in white background dirty? platen.
parts of the image.

White or color dots appear ― Select the [System Menu/Counter] key ―

on the printed images. > [Adjustment/Maintenance] >
[Service Setting] > [MC] and decrease
the adjustment value. Decrease the
decreased by 1 level, decrease by 1
level again. If there is still no
improvement, return the setting to the
original value.

[Service Setting] > [DEV-CLN], and
then select [OK].
Printed images are fuzzy. Is the machine being used in conditions Use in an environment that has suitable ―
of very humid, or humidity or humidity.
temperature rapidly changes?
Printed images are skewed. Are the originals placed correctly? When placing originals on the platen, align page 5-2
them with the original size indicator plates.
When placing originals in the document page 5-3

processor, align the original width guides
securely before placing the originals.
Is the paper loaded correctly? Check the position of the paper width page 3-4
guides.
Irregular horizontal lines ― Select the [System Menu/Counter] key ―

appear in the image. > [Adjustment/Maintenance] >
10-13
Reference
Page
The altitude is 1000 m or ― Select the [System Menu/Counter] key ―
higher and irregular > [Adjustment/Maintenance] >
horizontal white lines appear [Service Setting] > [Altitude
in the image. Adjustment], and set to an elevation
one level higher than the current setting.
The altitude is 1000 m or ― Select the [System Menu/Counter] key ―

higher and dots appear in > [Adjustment/Maintenance] >
the image. [Service Setting] > [Altitude
Adjustment], and set to an elevation
one level higher than the current setting.
Printouts have vertical lines. Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. page 10-3
― Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. page 10-34
Dirt on the top edge or back Is the interior of the machine dirty? Clean the interior of the machine. page 10-4
of the paper.
Part of the image is ― Open and then close the rear cover. ―
periodically faint or shows
white lines. ― Run [Drum Refresh]. page 10-34

[Service Setting] > [MC] and decrease
the adjustment value. Decrease the
decreased by 1 level, decrease by 1
level again. If there is still no
improvement, return the setting to the
original value.
10-14
Reference
Page
The previous image remains ― Make sure the paper type setting is page 8-15
and lightly printed. correct for the paper being used.

Color printing trouble

When the following color printing trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures.
Reference
Page
Skewed-color printout. ― Run [Calibration]. page 10-34
― Run [Color Registration]. page 10-29
Colors appear different than Did you choose appropriate image Select appropriate image quality. page 6-19
you anticipated. quality for the original?
Have you loaded color copy paper into Load color copy paper into the paper ―
the paper tray? tray.

Adjust the color balance.
― When printing from a computer ―

Adjust the color using the printer driver.
The color toner is empty. Do you want to continue printing in black If the black toner is remained, the page 8-18
and white? machine continues printing in black and
white by selecting [Print in Black and
White] of [Color Toner Empty Action].
10-15
Responding to Messages
If the touch panel or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.
NOTE
When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.
To check the serial number, refer to the following:
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page i)
Reference
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Access point was not ― Check if the access point has been ―
detected. set correctly.
Activation error. ― Turn the power switch off and on. If page 2-10
the error exists, contact
administrator.
Add the following paper Is the indicated cassette out of Load paper. page 3-2
in cassette #. paper? Select [Paper Selection] to select
the other paper source. Select
[Continue] to print on the paper in
the currently selected paper source.
Add the following paper Does the selected paper size Select [Continue] to continue —
in the multipurpose tray. matches the paper size loaded in printing.
the specified paper source? Select [Cancel] to cancel the job.
Is the indicated cassette out of Load paper. page 3-2

paper? Select [Paper Selection] to select
the other paper source. Select
[Continue] to print on the paper in
the currently selected paper source.
Adjusting… ― The machine is under the —

adjustment to maintain its quality.
Please wait.
Reference
Page
Box is not found. ― The specified box cannot be found. —
Job is canceled. Select [End].
Box limit exceeded.*1 Is [End] displayed on the screen? The specified box is full, and no —
further storage is available; Job is
canceled. Select [End]. Try to
perform the job again after printing
or deleting data from the box.
*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details
on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:
10-16
Reference
Page
Calibrating… — The machine is under the page 10-34
Please wait.
Cannot connect to — Set machine time to match the page 2-23

Authentication Server.*1 server's time.
— Check the domain name. page 9-2
— Check the host name. page 9-2
— Check the connection status with —

the server.
Cannot connect to — Check the connection status with —

Server. the server.
Cannot connect. ― This appears when the Wi-Fi or —

Wi-Fi Direct connection did not
complete. Check the settings, and
check the signal conditions.
Cannot duplex print on Did you select a paper size/type Select [Paper Selection] to select page 6-12
the following paper.*1 that cannot be duplex printed? the available paper. Select
[Continue] to print without using
Duplex function.
10-17
Reference
Page
Cannot print the — Only one copy is available. Select —
specified number of [Continue] to continue printing.
copies.*1 Select [Cancel] to cancel the job.
The machine may reproduce the
same originals by arranging the
following settings:
• Uncheck [RAM Disk] in the
[Device Settings] tab of the
printer's properties.
NOTE
If you unchecked the [RAM Disk],
check the [RAM Disk] again after
the printing is completed. If not,
print speed may be reduced.
Do you want to print the data stored Only one copy is available. Select
in the USB memory? [Continue] to continue printing.
Select [Cancel] to cancel the job.
following settings:
• Reduce the number of copies to
be printed at once.
Furthermore, the machine may
reproduce the same originals by
arranging the following settings:
• Select [Copy Priority] of
Optional Memory in System
Menu.
NOTE
Before changing the Optional
Memory setting, contact your
administrator.
Cannot process this ― This job is canceled because it is ―

job.*1 restricted by User Authorization or
Job Accounting. Select [End].
Cannot recognize. ― Make sure your ID card has been Card

registered. Authentication
Kit(B)
Operation
Guide
Cleaning the laser — The machine is under the ―

scanner… adjustment to maintain its quality.
Please wait.
10-18
Reference
Page
Failed to specify Job — Failed to specify Job Accounting —
Accounting.*1 when processing the job externally.
The job is canceled. Select [End].
Failed to store job — The job is canceled. Select [End]. —

retention data. Insufficient free space in the Job
Box. Try to perform the job again
after printing or deleting data from
the Job Box.
Reference
Page
High temperature. — Adjust the temperature and the —
Adjust room temp. humidity of your room.
Reference
Page
Incorrect account ID.*1 — The account ID was incorrect when —
processing the job externally. The
job is canceled. Select [End].
Incorrect box password. — The box password was incorrect —

when processing the job externally.
The job is canceled. Select [End].
Incorrect Login User — The login user name or password —

Name or Password.*1 was incorrect when processing the
job externally. The job is canceled.
Select [End].
Inner tray is full of paper. — Remove paper from the inner tray. —
Select [Continue] to resume
printing. Select [Cancel] to cancel
the job.
10-19
Reference
Page
Job Accounting Is the acceptable printing count The printing count exceeded the ―
restriction exceeded. restricted by Job Accounting acceptable count restricted by Job
exceeded? Accounting. Cannot print any more.
This job is canceled. Select [End].
Reference
Page
KPDL error.*1 ― PostScript error has occurred. The ―
job is canceled. Select [End].
Reference
Page
Low temperature. Adjust — Adjust the temperature and the —
room temp. humidity of your room.
Reference
Page
Machine failure. ― Internal error has occurred. Make a ―
note of the error code displayed on
the screen, and contact your
Service Representative.
Maximum number of Is the acceptable scanning count Only one copy of the scanned pages —
scanned pages. exceeded? is available. Select [Continue] to
print, send or store the scanned
pages. Select [Cancel] to cancel
printing, sending or storing.
Memory card error. — An error has occurred on the —
memory card. Job is canceled.
Select [End].
The error cord is as follows.
04: Insufficient space on the
memory card to complete this
operation. Move data or delete
unneeded data.
10-20
Reference
Page
Memory is full.*1 Do you want to send the scanned The process cannot be performed page 6-27
image to the PC, or store the image due to insufficient memory. If only
in the machine? [End] is available, select [End]. The
job will be canceled.
following settings:
• Decrease [Image Quality] of
[File Format].
• Select [Normal] of Optional
Memory in System Menu.
NOTE
administrator.
Do you want to print data from the Unable to continue the job as the —
PC? memory is used up. Select
[Continue] to print the scanned
pages. The print job cannot be
processed completely. Select
[Cancel] to cancel the job.
following settings:
• Select [On] of RAM Disk Setting
in System Menu, and then
decrease the RAM disk size.
• Select [Printer Priority] of
Optional Memory in System Menu.
NOTE
Before changing the RAM Disk
Setting or Optional Memory setting,
contact your administrator.
Reference
Page
Paper jam. ― If a paper jam occurs, the machine page 10-35
will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the screen.
Leave the machine on and follow
the instruction to remove the
jammed paper.
Preparing… ― The machine is under the —

Please wait.
10-21
Reference
Page
RAM disk error. ― An error has occurred on the RAM page 8-37
disk. Job is canceled. Select [End].
04: Insufficient space on the RAM
disk. If the optional RAM disk is
installed, increase the RAM disk
size by changing RAM Disk Setting
in System Menu.
NOTE
The range of RAM disk size can be
increased by selecting [Printer
Priority] in Optional Memory.
Removable memory Is writing to a removable memory An error occurred in the removable ―

error. prohibited? memory. The job stopped. Select
[End].
01: Connect a removable memory
that can be written to.
― An error occurred in the removable ―

memory. The job stopped. Select
[End].
01: The amount of data that can be
saved at once has been exceeded.
Restart the system or turn the
power OFF/ON. If the error still
occurs, the removable memory is
not compatible with the machine.
Use the removable memory
formatted by this machine. If the
removable memory cannot be
formatted, it is damaged. Connect a
compatible removable memory.
10-22
Reference
Page
Removable Memory is ― Job is canceled. Select [End]. ―
full.*1 Insufficient free space in the
removable memory. Delete
unnecessary files.
Remove originals in the Are there any originals left in the Remove originals from the ―
document processor. document processor? document processor.
Replace all originals and — Remove originals from the —

press [Continue]. document processor, put them back
in their original order, and place
them again. Select [Continue] to
resume printing. Select [Cancel] to
cancel the job.
Running security — Running security function. Please —

function... wait.
Reference
Page
Scanner memory is — Scanning cannot be performed due —
full.*1 to insufficient memory of scanner.
Only one copy of the scanned
pages is available. Select
[Continue] to print, send or store
the scanned pages. Select [Cancel]
to cancel the printing job.
following settings:
• Reduce the number of originals
to be scanned at once.
• Select [Copy Priority] of
Optional Memory in System
Menu.
NOTE
administrator.
Scheduled sending jobs — The number of jobs has exceeded —

exceeded. the limit set for delayed
transmission. Select [End]. The job
is canceled.
Wait until the delayed transmission
is executed, or cancel the delayed
transmission and then perform the
job again.
10-23
Reference
Page
Send Error.*1 — An error has occurred during page 10-26
transmission. The job is canceled.
Select [End].
Refer to Responding to Send Error
for the error code and corrective
actions.
System error. — System error has occurred. Follow —

the instructions on the screen.
Reference
Page
The cover is open. Is there any cover which is open? Close the cover indicated on the —
screen.
Are the toner containers installed Make sure all four colors of toner page 10-5
correctly? Is a toner container out containers are installed correctly,
of place? and close the right cover.
The device cannot be — Cancel a connection to a portable —

connected because device that is not being used, or set
allowed connections the machine's auto disconnect time
would be exceeded. to break portable device
connections.
The manufacturer Is the installed toner container our We will not be liable for any damage —
assumes no own brand? caused by the use of third party
responsibility for supplies in this machine. If you want
damage caused by a to continue, select [Next].
non-genuine toner.
The phone receiver is off — Put down the receiver. —

the hook.
The slit glass requires — Clean the slit glass. page 10-3
cleaning.
This memory is not Is the removable memory formatted Perform [Format] on this machine. —
formatted. by this machine?
This will be formatted.
Are you sure?
This user account is — Contact administrator. —

locked out. Job is canceled. Select [End].
10-24
Reference
Page
Toner [C][M][Y][K] are — Replace the toner container to our page 10-5
empty. specified toner container. Replace
the toner container.
NOTE
If the color toner is empty but the
black toner is remained, the
machine continues printing in black
and white by selecting [Print in
Black and White] of Color Toner
Empty Action.
Toner is low. [C][M][Y][K] — It is almost time to replace the toner ―

(Replace when empty.) container. Obtain a new toner
container.
Reference
Page
Unknown toner installed. Is the installed toner container our We will not be liable for any damage ―
own brand? caused by the use of third party
supplies in this machine.
Unknown Toner Does the installed toner container's Install the specified container. ―
Installed. PC [C][M][Y][K] regional specification match the
machine's?
Reference
Page
Warning low memory. — Cannot start the job. Try again later. —
Reference
Page
You cannot use this box. — You cannot use the specified box. —
Job is canceled. Select [End].
10-25
Responding to Send Error
Error Reference
Message Corrective Actions
Code Page
1101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the host name of the SMTP server on the page 2-58
Embedded Web Server RX.
Failed to send via FTP. Check the host name of FTP. page 5-23
Failed to send via SMB. Check the host name of SMB. page 5-20
1102 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings. page 5-20
• Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain
name.
• Host name
• Path
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following on the Embedded Web Server page 2-58
RX.
• SMTP login user name and login password
• POP3 login user name and login password
• E-mail size limit
Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings. page 5-23
NOTE
name.
• Path
• Folder share permissions of the recipient
1103 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings. page 5-20
NOTE
name.
• Path
Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings. page 5-23
• Path
1104 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail address. page 5-18
NOTE
If the address is rejected by the domain, you cannot
send the email.
10-26
Error Reference
Code Page
1105 Failed to send via SMB. Select [On] of the SMB settings on the Embedded page 2-52
Web Server RX.
Failed to send the e-mail. Select [On] of the SMTP settings on the Embedded page 2-58
Web Server RX.
Failed to send via FTP. Select [On] of the FTP settings on the Embedded page 2-52
Web Server RX.
1106 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the sender address of SMTP on the Embedded page 2-58
Web Server RX.
1131 Failed to send via FTP. Select [On] of the secure protocol settings on the page 8-35
Embedded Web Server RX.
1132 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following of the SMTP server. Refer to the
• Is SMTP over SSL available? Embedded
Web Server
• Is the encryption available? RX User
Guide.
Failed to send via FTP. Check the following of the FTP server. —
• Is FTPS available?
• Is the encryption available?
2101 Failed to send via SMB. Check the network and SMB settings. —
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
• Host name and IP address
• Port number
Failed to send via FTP. Check the network and FTP settings. —
• Host name and IP address
• Port number
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network and Embedded Web Server RX. page 2-58
• POP3 server name of the POP3 user
• SMTP server name
10-27
Error Reference
Code Page
2102 Failed to send via FTP. Check the network. —
2103 • The network cable is connected.
Check the following of the FTP server. —

• Is FTP available?
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network. —

2201 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network. —

2202 Failed to send via FTP. • The network cable is connected.
2203 Failed to send via SMB. • The hub is not operating properly.
2231 • The server is not operating properly.
2204 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail size limit of the SMTP settings on page 2-58
the Embedded Web Server RX.
3101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the authentication methods of both the sender —
and the recipient.
Failed to send via FTP. Check the network. —

3201 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the SMTP user authentication method of the —
recipient.
0007 — Turn the power switch off and back on. If this error page 2-10
4201 occurs several times, make a note of the displayed
error code and contact your service representative.
4701
5101
5102
5103
5104
7101
7102
7103
720f
9181 — The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number —

of pages of 999. Send the excess pages separately.
10-28
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjustment/Maintenance
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance
If there is an image problem and the message to run adjustment or maintenance menu appears, run
Adjustment/Maintenance in the system menu.
The table below lists the item you can Procedure.

Color Registration Procedure Correct the color position to resolve color drift. page 10-29
Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. page 10-34
Calibration Adjust color drift or hue of printed image in the most appropriate color. page 10-34
Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical white lines from the printout. page 10-34
Color Registration Procedure

When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. Use this function to
correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color drift.
Auto registration and manual registration are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be largely corrected through
auto registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the manual registration.
IMPORTANT
Before performing color registration, be sure to perform Calibration. If color drift remains, perform color
registration. By performing color registration without performing Calibration, the color drift will be resolved
once, however, it may cause the serious color drift later.
Auto Correction
1 Load paper.
10-29
IMPORTANT
• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in
the multipurpose tray.
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is
curled or folded may cause paper jams.
above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width
guide, the paper may skew or become jammed.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Color Registration] > [Auto]
3 Print the chart.

Select [Start].
A chart is printed.
10-30
Chart Example
4 Perform the color registration.

1 As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with
the arrows toward the back.
2 Select [Start] to scan the chart.

When scanning is finished, color printing position correction starts.
3 When color printing position correction ends, Select [OK].
10-31
Manual Correction
1 Load paper.
IMPORTANT
multipurpose tray.
above).

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Color Registration] >
[Manual]
3 Print the chart.

Select [Print Chart].
A chart is printed. On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), charts for
H-1 to 5 and V-1 to 5 are printed.
10-32
Chart Example
4 Enter the appropriate value.

1 Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match. If this is the 0 position,
registration for that color is not required. For the illustration, B is the appropriate value.
From charts H-1 to H-5, read the values from H-1 to H-5.
From charts V-1 to V-5, read only the values from V-3 (center).
2 [Detail] > [Registration]
3 Select the chart to be corrected.
4 Select [+] or [-] to enter the values read from the chart.
Select [+] to increase the value from 0 to 9. To decrease, select [-].
By selecting [-], the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the
reverse direction, select [+].
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the registration values for each chart.
6 Select [Start] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins.
7 Select [OK] after color registration is complete.
10-33
Drum Refresh
Remove image blur and white dots from the printout.
NOTE
Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh]
2 Perform the drum refresh.

Select [Start]. "Drum Refresh" begins.
Calibration
Using this function enables printing in the most appropriate color by adjusting hue and color drift in detail.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Calibration]
2 Perform the calibration.

Select [Start]. "Calibration" begins.
NOTE
When the hue and color drift are not enhanced even after performing calibration, refer to the
following:
Color Registration Procedure (page 10-29)
Laser Scanner Cleaning

Remove vertical white lines from the printout.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Laser Scanner Cleaning]
2 Perform the laser scanner cleaning.

Select [Start]. "Laser Scanner Cleaning" begins.
10-34
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, the touch panel will display "Paper Jam." and the machine will stop.
Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed paper.
Jam Location Indicators

10:10 1 Shows the location of a paper jam.
2 Shows the previous step.
Paper jam. 4
Clear the paper jammed in 3 Shows the next step.
1 Cassette 1.
Press [Next >] to follow 4 Shows the removal procedure.

the instructions.
JAM 0001 1/3

3
2 < Back Next >
Status/Job Cancel. 10:10 5 Selecting [Status/Job Cancel] key

Status displays [Hold]. Selecting [Hold]
Print Job Status displays status screen, and the status
Send Job Status of jobs can be checked.
1/5
Store Job Status 6 Select [Display Error] to return to the
Scheduled Job
paper jam guidance.
Display
Error 6 Pause All
Print Jobs
Close
If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the touch panel as well as the clearing instructions.
D
10:10
Paper jam.
Clear the paper jammed in

Cassette 1.
Press [Next >] to follow

the instructions.
JAM 0001 1/3

E
Next >
F
C
A
B
Paper Jam Location Indicator Paper Jam Location Reference Page

A Cassette 1 page 10-36
B Cassette 2 page 10-36
C Multipurpose Tray page 10-39
D Document Processor page 10-45
E Duplex Unit page 10-42
F Rear Cover 1 page 10-42
After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes
with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.
10-35
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1 Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.
2 Remove any jammed paper.
3 Push Cassette 1 back in.
10-36
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2
CAUTION
1 Open Rear Cover 2.
3 Push Rear Cover 2.
10-37
10-38
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray
CAUTION
2 Remove all the paper.
3 Push the multipurpose tray.
10-39
5 Open Feed Cover.
7 Push Feed Cover back in.
10-40
9 Open the multipurpose tray.
10 Reload the paper.
10-41
Remove any jammed paper in Rear Cover 1
CAUTION
The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting
burned.
1 Open Rear Cover 1.
3 Open the cover (A).
10-42
5 Open the feed cover (B).
7 Open the duplex unit (C).
10-43
9 Push Rear Cover 1.
10-44
Remove any jammed paper in the Document

Processor
CAUTION
1 Remove the originals from the Original Table.
2 Open the front cover and remove any jammed paper.
3 Remove originals inside the document processor.
10-45
4 Push the cover.
10-46
11 Appendix
Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2
Optional Applications .............................................................................................................................. 11-6
Starting Application Use .......................................................................................................................... 11-6
Checking Details of Application .............................................................................................................. 11-7
Character Entry Method .................................................................................................................................... 11-8
Entry Screens ......................................................................................................................................... 11-8
Entering Characters .............................................................................................................................. 11-10
Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 11-11
Basic Paper Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-11
Choosing the Appropriate Paper .......................................................................................................... 11-12
Special Paper ........................................................................................................................................ 11-15
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 11-19
Machine ................................................................................................................................................ 11-19
Copy Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 11-21
Printer Functions ................................................................................................................................... 11-21
Scanner Functions ................................................................................................................................ 11-22
Document Processor ............................................................................................................................ 11-22
Paper Feeder ........................................................................................................................................ 11-23
Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-24
11-1
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
Overview of Optional Equipment
The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
(1) Expansion Memory
(3) Card Authentication

Kit (B)
(2) PF-5110
Software option
(4) UG-33
(5) SD/SDHC Memory Card
(6) USB Keyboard
11-2
(1) "Expansion Memory"

The machine can perform the more multiple jobs simultaneously by adding more memories. You can increase the
machine's memory up to 1,536 MB by plugging in the optional memory modules.
Precautions for Handling the Memory Modules
To protect electronic parts, discharge static electricity from your body by wearing an antistatic wrist strap, if possible,
when you install the memory modules. If you do not have a wristband, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity
before inserting the memory.
Installing the Memory Modules
1 Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable.
2 Remove the covers.
3 Remove the memory module from its package.
4 With the memory connection terminal pointing toward the socket, align the cut-out part with
the socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle.
5 Carefully press the inserted memory down and into the machine.
6 Reinstall the covers.
11-3
(2) PF-5110 "Paper Feeder"

The paper feeder can be installed in the printer.
Loading in the Cassette 2 (page 3-7)
(3) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"

User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on
the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this information, refer to the
following:
Card Authentication Kit(B) Operation Guide
(4) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
(5) "SD/SDHC Memory Card"

An SD/SDHC memory card is useful for storing fonts, macros, and overlays. The machine is equipped with a slot for an
SDHC memory card with a maximum size of 32 GB, and an SD memory card with a maximum size of 2 GB.
IMPORTANT
Reading the SD/SDHC Memory Card

Once inserted in the machine's slot, the contents of the SD/SDHC memory card can be read from the operation panel or
automatically when you power on or reset the machine.
Installing and Formatting the SD/SDHC Memory Card

To use an unused SD/SDHC memory card, you must first use the machine to format the SD/SDHC memory card.
1 Power off the machine and unplug the power cord.
2 Remove the cover.
11-4
3 Insert the SD/SDHC memory card into the SD/SDHC memory card slot.
4 Replace the covers.
(6) USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"

A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also
available to install the keyboard on the machine. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on
keyboards that are compatible with your machine before you purchase one.
11-5
Optional Applications
The applications listed below are installed on this machine.
Application
Card Authentication Kit
ThinPrint Option*1
*1 This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.
NOTE
• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the
application.
• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Starting Application Use
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] >

[Optional Function]
NOTE
2 Select the desired application and select [Activate].

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ].
3 Select [Official] and enter a license key.

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen
does not appear, go to Step 4.
To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.
4 Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
NOTE
• If you started the Thin Print option and entered the license key, turn the power OFF/ON.
• Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
11-6
Checking Details of Application
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] >

[Optional Function]
NOTE
2 Select the desired application and select [ ].

You can view detailed information on the selected application.
The table below lists the item you can view.
Item
Function Name
License
Remaining Counts
Expiration Date
Status
Extend the trial period.

[Extend] > [Yes]
The trial period is extended.
11-7
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Character Entry Method

To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below.
NOTE
Keyboard Layout
"QWERTY", "QWERTZ" and "AZERTY" are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Select the
[System Menu/Counter] key, [Common Settings] and then [Keyboard Layout] to choose the desired layout.
"QWERTY" layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.
Entry Screens
Lower-case Letter Entry Screen
12 11 10 9 8
Add - Name
1 Abc Input: 3
Limit: 32
ABC A/a Del.
q w e r t y u i o p
2 a s d f g h j k l 7
@ z x c v b n m . 6
3 4 5
No. Display/Key Description
1 Display Displays entered characters.
2 Keyboard Select the character to enter.
3 [Cancel] Select to cancel entered characters and return to the screen before
the entry was made.
4 [< Back] Select to return to the previous screen.
5 [OK] / [Next >] Select to save the entered characters and move to the next screen.
6 Enter Key Select to enter a line break.
7 Space Key Select to insert a space.
8 Delete Key Select to delete a character to the left of the cursor.
9 [Input] / [Limit] Displays maximum number of characters and the number of

Display characters entered.
10 Cursor Key Select to move the cursor on the display.
11 [A/a] / [A/a] Select to switch between upper case and lower case.
12 [ABC] / [Symbol] Select the characters that are entered. To enter symbols or numbers,
select [Symbol].
11-8
Upper-case Letter Entry Screen
Add - Name
AB Input: 2
Limit: 32
ABC A/a Del.
Q W E R T Y U I O P
A S D F G H J K L
_ Z X C V B N M ~
Number/Symbol Entry Screen
Add - Name
123 Input: 3
Limit: 32
Symbol Del.
13
No. Display/Key Description

13 [ ]/[ ] To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard, select the
cursor key and scroll the screen to view other numbers or symbols to
enter.
11-9
Entering Characters
Follow the steps below to enter 'List A-1' for an example.
1 Enter 'List', (space).

Add - Name Add - Name
L 1, 3 Input: 1
Limit: 32
List 8 Input: 5
Limit: 32
4
ABC A/a Del. ABC A/a Del.
Q W E R T Y U
2
I O P q w e r t y u i o 7p
5 6
A S D F G H J K L a s d f g h j k l
_ Z X C V B N M ~ @ z x c v b n m .
Cancel < Back Next > Cancel < Back Next >
To shift from lower case to upper case letters, select [A/a]. To shift from upper case to lower
case letters, select [A/a].
2 Enter 'A-1'.
Add - Name Add - Name
List A 2 Input: 6
Limit: 32
List A-1 Input:
Limit:
8
32
ABC A/a Del.
4 Symbol Del.
1 Q W E R T Y U I O P
A S D F G H J K L
_ Z X C V B N M ~ 3
Cancel < Back Next > Cancel < Back Next >
To enter numbers or symbols, select [ABC] to display [Symbol].
3 Register the characters you entered.

Add - Name
List A-1 Input: 8

Limit: 32
Symbol Del.
Select [Next>]. The entered characters are registered.
11-10
Appendix > Paper
Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.
For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to the
following:
Specifications (page 11-19)
Basic Paper Specifications

This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as
laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.
Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.
Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.
Basic Paper Specifications that can be Used with This Machine

The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections
for further details.
Criteria Specifications
Weight Cassettes: 60 to 163 g/m2
Multi purpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2, 230 g/m2 (Cardstock)
Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°
Moisture content 4 to 6%
Pulp content 80% or more
NOTE
Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications
shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of
recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and
contains low levels of paper dust.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.
11-11
Appendix > Paper
Choosing the Appropriate Paper

This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper
fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may
also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,
avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.
Ingredients
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those
types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.
Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content
consists of cotton or other fibers.
Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several
sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.
Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in
area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard
size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause
paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several
sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to
adhere correctly.
Moisture Content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is
supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.
Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to
become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,
making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.
Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.
To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.
• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.
• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for
a while.
• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.
Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.
• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.
• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
11-12
Appendix > Paper
Other Paper Specifications

Porosity: The density of the paper fibers.
Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls
upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.
Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be
discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.
Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.
Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough,
sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you
cut the paper yourself.
Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have
been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.
Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the
basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.
• Glossy paper
• Watermarked paper
• Paper with an uneven surface
• Perforated paper
11-13
Appendix > Paper
Paper Sizes that can be Used with This Machine

Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.
Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must
be 90° ± 0.2°.
Multipurpose Tray
• Hagaki (Cardstock) (100 × 148 mm)
• Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (148 × 200 mm)
• Envelope Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2")
• Envelope #10 (4-1/8 × 9-1/2")
• Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)
• Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm)
• Envelope #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8")
• Envelope #6 3/4 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2")
• Statement
• Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)
• Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)
• Custom (70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)
Cassettes or Multipurpose Tray

• Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2")
• Letter
• Legal
• A4 (297 × 210 mm)
• B5 (257 × 182 mm)
• A5-R (148 × 210 mm)
• A5 (210 × 148 mm)
• A6 (148 × 105 mm)
• B6 (182 × 128 mm)
• B5(ISO) (176 × 250 mm)
• Oficio II
• 216 × 340 mm
• 16K (273 × 197 mm)
• Statement-R
• Folio (210 × 330 mm)
• Custom (Cassette: 105 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm, Multipurpose Tray: 70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)
11-14
Appendix > Paper
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.
Special Paper that can be Used with This Machine

• Transparencies
• Preprinted paper
• Bond paper
• Recycled paper
• Thin paper
• Letterhead
• Colored paper
• Prepunched paper
• Envelopes
• Hagaki (Cardstock)
• Thick paper
• Labels
• Coated
• High-quality paper
When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as
laser printers). Use the multipurpose tray for transparencies, thin paper, envelopes, cardstocks, label paper and coated.
Choosing Special Paper

Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary
considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than
regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the
print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not
responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.
Select a cassette or multipurpose tray for special paper.
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.
Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C
Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm
Material Polyester
Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°
To avoid problems, use the multipurpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the
machine.
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
11-15
Appendix > Paper
Label
Be sure to feed labels from the multipurpose tray.
For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine
and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled
labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Top sheet
Adhesive layer
Carrier sheet
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected
by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of
labels may cause more problems.
The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,
resulting in a serious failure.
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the
carrier sheet before completing output.
Allowed Not allowed
Top sheet
Carrier sheet
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.
Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²
Basis weight 104 to 151 g/m²

(overall paper weight)
Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm
Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm
Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)
11-16
Appendix > Paper
Hagaki (Cardstock)
Burrs
Burrs
Before loading Hagaki (Cardstock) into the multipurpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki (Cardstock)
paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki (Cardstock) may cause jams.
Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (available at post offices). Some Hagaki (Cardstock) may still have rough
edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki (Cardstock)
on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.
Envelopes
Use the multipurpose tray for envelopes.
Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin
envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing
envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.
Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are
ready to use them.
Keep the following points in mind.
• Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is
exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes
off in the machine.
• Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a
string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.
• If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
Thick Paper
Before loading thick paper, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a
paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki (Cardstock) by placing the paper on a
flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.
NOTE
If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper with the leading edge raised a few
millimeters.
Colored Paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications.
Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-11)
In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
11-17
Appendix > Paper
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications.
The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use
paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.
Recycled Paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.
NOTE
Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.
Coated Paper
Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than
plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing.
The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making
the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated
side appears slightly glossy.
IMPORTANT
When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture
may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine. If printing in very humid
environments, set coated paper for one sheet each.
11-18
Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
IMPORTANT
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NOTE
For more information on using the FAX, refer to the following:
FAX Operation Guide
Machine
Item Description
Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 163 g/m2
Multipurpose 60 to 220 g/m2, 230 g/m2 (Cardstock)
Tray
Paper Type Cassette Plain, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched,
Letterhead, Thick, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multipurpose Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Tray Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Coated, Color, Prepunched,
Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
Executive,Oficio II, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 16K, B5(ISO),
Custom (105 × 148 mm to 216 × 356 mm)
Multipurpose A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal,
Tray Statement-R, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5(ISO),
Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock),
Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2,
Custom (70 × 148 mm to 216 × 356 mm)
Printable area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4.2 mm.
Warm-up Time Power on 29 seconds or less
23°C/73.4°F, Sleep 13 seconds or less
60 %
Paper Capacity Cassette 250 sheets (80 g/m2)*1
Multipurpose 50 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (80 g/m2)
Tray
Output Tray Inner tray 150 sheets (80 g/m2)
Capacity
Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Memory 512 MB
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.
11-19
Item Description
Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
USB Port: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Wireless LAN support
Fax: 1
Operating Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
Environment
Humidity 10 to 80 %
Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum
Brightness 1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H) 16.42" × 16.89" × 19.49"
(Including the Document 417 × 429 × 495 mm
Processor)
Weight Approx. 57.33 lb/Approx. 26 kg
(without toner container)
Space Required (W × D) 16.42" × 24.14"
(Using multipurpose tray) 417 × 613 mm
Power Source 120 V Specification Model: 120 V 60 Hz 8.6 A

230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50 Hz 4.5 A
The power consumption of the 2.2W
product in networked standby (If
all network ports are connected.)
Options Optional Equipment (page 11-2)
11-20
Copy Functions
Item Description
Copy Speed Black and White Copying Full Color Copying
A4/A5 26 sheets/min 26 sheets/min
Letter 27 sheets/min 27 sheets/min
Legal 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min
B5 27 sheets/min 27 sheets/min
A5-R 27 sheets/min 27 sheets/min
A6 27 sheets/min 27 sheets/min
16K 27 sheets/min 27 sheets/min
First Copy Time Black and 8 seconds or less

(A4, place on White
the platen, feed
from Cassette) Color 10 seconds or less
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments

Auto mode: Preset Zoom
Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets
Resolution 600 × 600 dpi, 9600 dpi equivalent × 600 dpi
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Legal/
Folio)
Original Feed System Fixed
Printer Functions
Item Description
Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed.
First Print Time Black and 9.5 seconds or less

(A4, feed from White
Cassette)
Color 10.5 seconds or less
Resolution 9600 dpi equivalent × 600 dpi,

1200 dpi × 1200 dpi (Data resolution is 600 dpi.)*1
Operating System Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2,
Windows Server 2012/R2, Mac OS 10.5 or later
Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Page Description Language PRESCRIBE
Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF,

XPS, OpenXPS
*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.
11-21
Scanner Functions
Item Description
Resolution 300 × 300 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi*1,
400 × 400 dpi*1, 200 × 400 dpi*1
File Format TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, PDF (MMR/JPEG

compression), XPS, High compressive PDF, Encrypted PDF, OPEN
XPS, PDF/A-1
Scanning Speed*2 1-sided B/W 30 Images/min

Color 12 Images/min
2-sided B/W 24 Images/min
Color 8 Images/min
(A4 landscape, 300 dpi × 600 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T), USB,

Transmission System SMBv3, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*3, WIA*4, WSD
*1 One-sided scanning
*2 When using the document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*3 Available Operating System: Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008/
Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2012 R2
*4 Available Operating System: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/
Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows 10
Document Processor
Item Description
Supported Original Types Sheet originals
Paper Size Maximum: Legal/A4

Minimum: Statement/A6
Paper Weight 50 to 160 g/m2
Loading Capacity 50 sheets (50 to 80 g/m²) maximum*1
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor
11-22
Paper Feeder
Item Description
Paper Supply Method Friction retard feeder
(No. Sheets: 250, 80 g/m2, 1 cassette)
Paper Size A4, A5-R, A5, B5, A6, B6, Letter, Legal, Folio, 216 × 340 mm,
Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5(ISO),
Custom (105 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)
Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 163 g/m²

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special Paper
Dimensions 16.15" × 17.62" × 5.79"

(W) × (D) × (H) 410 × 447.5 × 147 mm
Weight Approx. 8.16 lb/Approx. 3.7 kg
NOTE
Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
11-23
Appendix > Glossary
Glossary
Accessibility
The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or
visually impaired.
Apple Talk
AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another
computer on the same AppleTalk network.
Auto Form Feed Timeout

During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form
feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints output. However, no output is
performed if the last page has no data to be printed.
Auto-IP
Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP
requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0
to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.
Auto Paper Selection

A function to automatically select paper in the same size as originals when printing.
Auto Sleep
A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data transfer for a
specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.
Bonjour
Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and
services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically
recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives
network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that
Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run
stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets
are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly
for Bonjour.
Default Gateway
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing
computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address,
data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client
computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.
11-24
Appendix > Glossary
DHCP (IPv6)
DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends
the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the
network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an
IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management
workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.
dpi (dots per inch)

A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).
EcoPrint Mode
A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.
Emulation
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of
PCL6, KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible).
Enhanced WSD
Proprietary web services.
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP,
FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.
Grayscale
A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black
at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:
that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16
bits.
Help
A ? (Help) key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like
more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press the ? (Help) key to
view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.
IP Address
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.
The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be
between 0 and 255.
IPP
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be
sent between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and
enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication
mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.
11-25
Appendix > Glossary
Job Box
The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data
later using the printer's operation panel.
KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)

Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.
Multipurpose (MP) Tray

The paper supply tray on the front side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto
envelopes, Hagaki (Cardstock), transparencies, or labels.
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)

An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller
networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities
to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as
a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.
Outline font
With outline fonts, character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced
in different ways by changing the numeric values of those expressions. Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts,
since the characters are defined with outlines represented with numerical expressions. You can specify the font size in
steps of 0.25 points up to 999.75 points.
PDF/A
This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use
of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a
specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A-
2), is currently being prepared.
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)

A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional
graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that
enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for
the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.
PPM (prints per minute)

This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.
Printer Driver
The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is
contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.
11-26
Appendix > Glossary
RA(Stateless)
The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information
is the Router Advertisement (RA).
ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control
Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".
RAM Disk
Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer memory as a
RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time).
Send as E-mail
A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected
from the list or entered at each time.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as
well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.
Status Page
The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source
settings.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address.
A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in
the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,
in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network
address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In
this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network
address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet
address. When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the "DHCP" setting to "Off".
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)

TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other
over a network.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and
expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also
introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.
TWAIN (Technology Without An Interesting Name)

A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to computers. The
TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted
on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.
11-27
Appendix > Glossary
USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0

A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with
USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)

A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices. This
function replaces what TWAIN used to do. The feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of
operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)

WPS is a network security standard created by Wi-Fi Alliance, to make it easy to connect with the wireless devices and
set up the Wi-Fi Protected Access. The WPS-supported services can connect to the wireless access points by pushing
a button or entering passphrases.
11-28
Index Color Selection 6-16
Default 8-16
Combine 6-14
A Common Settings 8-10
Accessibility 11-24 Color Toner Empty Action 8-18
Address Book 3-20 Default Screen 8-10
Adding 3-20 Display Status/Log 8-19
Contact 3-20 Error Handling 8-18
Deleting 3-25 Format SD Card 8-19
Editing 3-24 Function Defaults 8-16
Group 3-23 Keyboard Layout 8-19
Address Book/One Touch 8-22 Low Toner Alert 8-18
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-41 Measurement 8-18
AirPrint 4-10 Original Settings 8-11
Anti-theft Lock Slot 2-3 Paper Settings 8-13
Apache License (Version 2.0) 1-11 Preset Limit 8-17
Apple Talk 11-24 Sound 8-10
Auto Error Clear 8-40 USB Keyboard Type 8-19
Auto Form Feed Timeout 11-24 Connecting
Auto Panel Reset 8-38 LAN Cable 2-8
Auto Paper Selection 11-24 Power Cable 2-9
Auto Sleep 2-32, 11-24 USB cable 2-9
Auto-IP 11-24 Connection Method 2-7
Settings 8-28 Continuous Scan 6-24
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function 1-14 Default 8-16
Contrast 6-22, 8-41
Conventions Used in This Guide xix
B Copy 5-15
Background Density Adjustment 6-23 Copy Settings 8-20
Default 8-16 Auto % Priority 8-20
Bonjour 11-24 Auto Paper Selection 8-20
Settings 8-30 DP Read Action 8-20
Button (Right Cover Open) 2-2 Copy Speed 11-21
Correcting Black Line 8-41
C Counting the Number of Pages Printed
Cables 2-7 Counter 2-50
Calibration 8-41, 10-34 Each Job Account 9-39
Card Authentication Kit 11-4 Print Accounting Report 9-40
Cassette Total Accounting 9-39
Loading Paper 3-4, 3-7 Unknown ID Job 9-42
Cassette 1 2-2
Cassette 2 2-6 D
Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-8 Date Format 8-38
Character Entry Method 11-8 Date/Time 8-38
Checking the Counter 2-50 Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-38
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7-13 Auto Error Clear 8-40
Cleaning 10-2 Auto Panel Reset 8-38
Glass Platen 10-2 Date Format 8-38
Paper Transfer Unit 10-4 Date/Time 8-38
Slit Glass 10-3 EnergySaver RecoveryLevel 8-39
Coated Paper 11-18 Error Clear Timer 8-40
Collate 6-16 Panel Reset Timer 8-38
Default 8-16 Ping Timeout 8-40
Color Sleep Level 8-39
Calibration 10-34 Sleep Rules 8-39, 8-40
Color Balance 6-21 Sleep Timer 8-39, 8-40
Saturation 6-24 Time Zone 8-38
Color Balance 6-21 Unusable Time 8-40
Color Registration 8-41 Default Gateway 11-24
Settings 8-28
Index-1
Default Screen 8-10 Energy Saving Control Function 1-14
Density 6-11 Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program 1-14
Density Adjustment 8-41 Enhanced WSD 11-25
Destination Protocol Settings 8-34
Adding a Destination 3-20 Enhanced WSD over SSL
Address Book 5-34 Protocol Settings 8-34
Checking and Editing 5-38 Enter key 2-19
Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-38 Entry
Dest. Check before Send 8-21 File Name 6-26
Entry Check for New Dest. 8-21 Subject 6-32
Multi Sending 5-30 Environment 1-3
One Touch Key 3-26 Error Clear Timer 8-40
Search 5-34 Error Handling 8-18
Sort 8-23 eSCL
Device 7-11 Protocol Settings 8-35
DHCP 11-24 eSCL over SSL
Settings 8-28 Protocol Settings 8-35
DHCP (IPv6) 11-25 Expansion Memory 11-3
Settings 8-29
Display Brightness 8-41 F
Display Status/Log 8-19 Favorites 5-8
Document Box Editing and Deleting 5-12
Job Box 4-11, 5-40 Recalling 5-11
Removable Memory Box 5-40 Registering 5-9
Document Box Settings 8-22 FAX 8-22
Job Box 8-22 Feed Cover 2-4
Polling Box 8-22 File
Sub Address Box 8-22 Format 6-27
Document Processor 2-2 PDF 6-28
Loading Originals 5-3 Separation 6-31
Originals Not Supported File Format 6-27
by the Document Processor 5-3 Default 8-16
Originals Supported File Management Utility Connection 5-29
by the Document Processor 5-3 File Name Entry 6-26
Part Names 2-2 Default 8-17
dpi 11-25 File Separation 6-31
Drum Refresh 8-41 Default 8-16
DSM Scan First Copy Time 11-21
Protocol Settings 8-31 First Print Time 11-21
Duplex 6-12 FTP 11-25
Duplex (2-sided Original) 6-30 FTP Client (Transmission)
Protocol Settings 8-30
E FTP Encrypted TX 6-33
EcoPrint 6-20, 11-25 Default 8-17
Default 8-16 FTP Server (Reception)
Printer 8-24 Protocol Settings 8-31
Edit Destination Function Defaults 8-16
Address Book 3-20 Fuser Cover 2-4
Address Book Defaults 8-23
Contact 3-20 G
Group 3-23 Glossary 11-24
One Touch Key 3-26 Google Cloud Print 4-10
E-mail Settings 2-58 GPL/LGPL 1-9
E-mail Subject/Body 6-32 Grayscale 11-25
Default 8-17 Group Authorization Set. 9-15
Embedded Web Server RX 2-52 Group Authorization 9-15
Emulation 11-25 Group List 9-16
Selection 8-24 Group Authorization Settings 9-15
Encrypted PDF Password 6-34
Energy Saver Recovery Level 8-39
Index-2
Guest Authorization Set. 9-18 Job Accounting 9-28
Guest Authorization 9-18 Adding an Account 9-30
Guest Property 9-19 Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-39
Guides Provided with the Machine xvi Default Setting 9-38
Deleting an Account 9-33
H Editing an Account 9-32
Handle 2-2, 2-3 Enabling Job Accounting 9-29
Help 11-25 FAX Driver 9-37
Help Screen 2-20 Job Accounting Access 9-29
High Compression PDF 6-27 Login 9-41
Default 8-17 Logout 9-41
Home 8-19 Overview of Job Accounting 9-28
Customize Desktop 2-13 Print Accounting Report 9-40
Customize Task Screen 2-13 Printing 9-34
Wallpaper 2-13 Restricting the Use of the Machine 9-31
Home Screen 2-12 TWAIN 9-35
Host Name 8-26 WIA 9-36
HTTP Job Box 11-26
Protocol Settings 8-32 Deletion of Job Retention 8-22
HTTPS Private Print Box 4-12
Protocol Settings 8-32 Proof and Hold Box 4-15
Hue Adjustment 6-20 Quick Copy Box 4-14
Quick Copy Job Retention 8-22
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer
I and Storing the Job 4-11
Image Quality 6-27 Stored Job Box 4-13
Default 8-17 Job Finish Notice 6-25
Inner Tray 2-2 JPEG/TIFF Print 6-34
Install Default 8-17
Macintosh 2-45
Software 2-37
Windows 2-38 K
Interface Block Setting 8-36 Keyboard Layout 8-19
IP Address 11-25 Knopflerfish License 1-11
Settings 8-28 KPDL 11-26
IPP 11-25
Protocol Settings 8-32 L
IPP over SSL Label 11-16
Protocol Settings 8-33 LAN Cable 2-7
IPSec Connecting 2-8
Settings 8-30 Language 8-5
Laser Scanner Cleaning 8-41, 10-34
J LDAP
Job Protocol Settings 8-31
Available Status 7-2 Legal Information 1-8
Canceling 7-10 Legal Restriction on Copying 1-6
Checking History 7-8 Legal Restriction on Scanning 1-6
Checking Status 7-2 Limited Use of This Product 1-7
Detailed Information 7-7 LINE Connector 2-4
Detailed Information of Histories 7-9 Loading Originals 5-2
Details of the Status Screens 7-3 Loading Originals in the Document Processor 5-3
Displaying Status Screens 7-2 Placing Originals on the Platen 5-2
Pause and Resumption 7-10 Login 2-21
Sending the Log History 7-9 Logout 2-22
Low Toner Alert 8-18
LPD
M
Management 9-1
Index-3
Manual Setting (IPv6) 8-29 P
Measurement 8-18 Panel Reset Timer 8-38
Media Type Setting 8-15 Paper
Mixed Size Originals 6-19 Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7-13
Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1-10 Appropriate Paper 11-12
Mopria 4-10 Custom Paper Size 8-13
Multi Sending 5-30 Default Paper Source 8-14
Multipurpose Tray 2-4, 11-26 Loading Cardstock 5-7
Paper Size and Media Type 8-9 Loading Envelopes 5-7
Loading Paper 3-2
N Loading Paper in the Cassettes 3-4, 3-7
NetBEUI 11-26 Media for Auto 8-14
Protocol Settings 8-30 Media Type Setting 8-14
Network Multipurpose Tray 8-9
Preparation 2-24 Paper Settings 8-13
Settings 8-26 Size and Media Type 8-8, 11-11
Network Interface 2-7 Special Paper 11-15
Network Interface Connector 2-4 Special Paper Action 8-14
Notice 1-2 Specifications 11-11
Weight 8-15
Paper Feed Mode 8-25
O
Paper Feeder (500-sheet) 11-4
One Touch Key
Paper Jams 10-35
Adding 3-26
Cassette 1 10-36
Deleting 3-28
Cassette 2 10-36
Editing 3-27
Cassette 3 (500-sheet x 2) 10-37
OpenSSL License 1-9
Document Processor 10-45
Operation Panel 2-2
Jam Location Indicators 10-35
Option
Multipurpose Tray 10-39
Card Authentication Kit 11-4
Rear Cover 1 10-42
Expansion Memory 11-3
Paper Length Guide 2-4, 3-4, 3-7
Overview 11-2
Paper Selection 6-9
Paper Feeder (500-sheet) 11-4
Paper Settings 8-13
SD/SDHC Memory Card 11-4
Paper Stopper 2-2, 3-9
ThinPrint Option 11-4
Paper Width Guides 2-4, 3-4, 3-7
USB Keyboard 11-5
Part Names 2-2
Optional Applications 11-6
PDF/A 6-27, 11-26
Optional Function 8-37
Default 8-17
Optional Memory 8-37
Ping 8-35
Original
Platen 2-2
Auto Detect Original Size (DP) 8-11
POP3 11-26
Custom Original Size 8-11
POP3 (E-mail RX)
Default Original Size 8-12
Settings 8-11
PostScript 11-26
Size xx
Power Cable
Original eject table 2-2
Connecting 2-9
Original Image 6-19
Power Management 1-14
Default 8-16
Power Off 2-10
Original Orientation 6-18
Power On 2-10
Default 8-16
Power Switch 2-2
Original Settings 8-11
PPM 11-26
Original Size 6-17
Precaution for Loading Paper 3-4, 3-7
Original Size Indicator Plates 2-2
Precautions for Use 1-4
Original SSLeay License 1-9
Preset Limit 8-17
Original Stopper 2-2
Primary Network (Client) 8-36
Original Table 2-2
Print Settings 4-2, 4-9
Original Width Guides 2-2
Outline font 11-26
Index-4
Printer 8-24 Restart 8-37
Auto Cassette Change 8-25 Restart Network 8-36
Color Setting 8-24 Right Cover 2-2
Copies 8-24
CR Action 8-25 S
Duplex 8-24 Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2
EcoPrint 8-24 Saturation 6-24
Emulation 8-24 Saving Documents to USB Memory 5-43
Form Feed TimeOut 8-24 Scan Resolution 6-32
Gloss Mode 8-25 Default 8-16
Job Name 8-25 SD Card
LF Action 8-24 Format 8-19
MP Tray Priority 8-25 SD/SDHC Memory Card 11-4
Orientation 8-24 Secure Protocol 8-35
Override A4/Letter 8-24 Security Level 8-36
Paper Feed Mode 8-25 Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN 1-6
Print setting 4-2 Send and Forward 8-21
User Name 8-25 Send as E-mail 5-17
Wide A4 8-24 Send Result Report 8-6
Printer Driver 11-26 Send Settings 8-21
Help 4-3 Color TIFF Compression 8-21
Printing Documents Stored Default Screen 8-21
in Removable USB Memory 5-41 Dest. Check before Send 8-21
Printing from PC 4-4 Entry Check for New Dest. 8-21
Printing Speed 11-21 New Destination Entry 8-21
Priority Override 6-26 Recall Destination 8-21
Product Library xvii Send and Forward 8-21
Send to Folder (FTP) 5-17
Q Send to Folder (SMB) 5-17
Quick No. Search key 2-19 Sending 5-17
Quick Setup Wizard 2-35 Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 3-10
Quiet Mode 2-34 Sending Size 6-31
Service Setting 8-41
R Setting Date and Time 2-23
RA (Stateless) 11-27 Sharpness 6-22
Settings 8-29 Shortcuts 5-13
RAM Disk 11-27 Adding 5-13
RAM Disk Setting 8-37 Editing and Deleting Shortcuts 5-14
Raw Simple Login 2-22
Protocol Settings 8-33 Simple Login Settings
Rear Cover 1 2-3 Simple Login 9-23
Rear Cover 2 2-6 Simple Login Setup 9-23
Recycled Paper 11-18 Skip Blank Page 6-23
Regarding Trade Names 1-8 Sleep 2-32
Regular Maintenance 10-2 Sleep Level 2-33, 8-39
Toner Container Replacement 10-5 Sleep Rules 2-33, 8-39, 8-40
Report 8-5 Sleep Timer 8-39, 8-40
Admin Report Settings 8-6 Slit Glass 2-2
Report Print 8-5 SMB Client (Transmission)
Result Report Settings 8-6 Protocol Settings 8-31
Sending Log History 8-7 SMTP 11-27
Report Print SMTP (E-mail TX)
Accounting Report 8-6 Protocol Settings 8-30
Font List 8-5 SNMPv1/v2c
Network Status 8-5 Protocol Settings 8-31
Service Status 8-5 SNMPv3
Status Page 8-5 Protocol Settings 8-32
Resolution 6-32, 11-21 Solving Malfunctions 10-9
Resource Saving - Paper 1-14 Sound 8-10
Responding to Messages 10-16
Index-5
Specifications 11-19 Toner Container (Cyan) 2-5
Copy Functions 11-21 Toner Container (Magenta) 2-5
Document Processor 11-22 Toner Container (Yellow) 2-5
Machine 11-19 Toner Container Lock Lever 2-5
Paper Feeder (500-sheet) 11-23 Toner Container Replacement 10-5
Printer Functions 11-21 Touch Panel 2-12
Scanner Functions 11-22 Tray Extension 2-4
SSL 8-35 Troubleshooting 10-9
Status Page 11-27 TWAIN 11-27
Status/Job Cancel 7-1 Setting TWAIN Driver 2-47
Storing Size 6-33
Subnet Mask 11-27 U
Settings 8-28 USB 11-28
Supplies USB Cable
Checking the Remaining Amount 7-13 Connecting 2-9
Symbols 1-2 USB Interface 2-7
System Menu 8-2 USB Interface Connector 2-4
Address Book/One Touch 8-22 USB Keyboard 11-5
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-41 USB Keyboard Type 8-19
Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-8 USB Memory
Common Settings 8-10 Printing 5-41
Copy 8-20 Remove 5-44
Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-38 Save 5-43
Document Box 8-22 USB Memory Slot 2-2
FAX 8-22 User Login Administration 9-2
Home 2-12 Adding a User 9-5
Language 8-5 Changing User Properties 9-8
Operation Method 8-2 Enabling User Login Administration 9-3
Printer 8-24 FAX Driver 9-14
Quick Setup Wizard 2-35 Group Authorization Settings 9-15
Report 8-5 Guest Authorization Set. 9-18
Send 8-21 ID Card Settings 9-25
System/Network 8-26 Login 2-21
User Login/Job Accounting 8-23 Logout 2-22
User Property 8-7, 9-10 Obtain NW User Property 9-21
System/Network 8-26 Overview of User Login Administration 9-2
Interface Block Setting 8-36 Printing 9-11
Network 8-26 Simple Login Settings 9-23
Optional Function 8-37 TWAIN 9-12
Optional Memory 8-37 User Account Lockout Setting 9-4
Primary Network (Client) 8-36 WIA 9-13
RAM Disk Setting 8-37 User Login/Job Accounting 8-23
Restart 8-37 Job Accounting 9-28
Security Level 8-36 Unknown ID Job 9-42
User Login 9-2
T User Property 8-7
TCP/IP 11-27
Settings 8-28, 8-29 W
TCP/IP (IPv4) WIA 11-28
Settings 2-24, 8-28 Setting WIA Driver 2-49
TCP/IP (IPv6) 11-25 Wi-Fi
Settings 8-29 Settings 2-26, 8-26
TEL Connector 2-4 Wi-Fi Direct
Thin Print over SSL Settings 2-30, 8-26
Protocol Settings 8-34 Wireless Connection 1-6
ThinPrint Wireless Network
Protocol Settings 8-34 Settings 2-26
ThinPrint Option 11-4 WPS 11-28
Time Zone 8-38 WSD Print
Toner Container (Black) 2-5 Protocol Settings 8-31
Index-6
WSD Scan 5-27
X
XPS Fit to Page 6-34
Default 8-17
Z
Zoom 6-10
Default 8-16
Index-7
TA Triumph-Adler GmbH
Betriebsstätte Norderstedt
Ohechaussee 235
22848 Norderstedt Rev.1 2016.6
Germany 2R7GEEN001

Ih P c2655w MFP Ta Uk Data PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ih P c2655w MFP Ta Uk Data PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ih P c2655w MFP Ta Uk Data PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P-C2655w MFP

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number

1 Legal and Safety Information ................................................................... 1-1

2 Installing and Setting up the Machine ..................................................... 2-1

3 Preparation before Use ............................................................................. 3-1

4 Printing from PC ........................................................................................ 4-1

5 Operation on the Machine ........................................................................ 5-1

6 Using Various Functions .......................................................................... 6-1

7 Status/Job Cancel ..................................................................................... 7-1

8 Setup and Registration (System Menu) .................................................. 8-1

10 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 10-1

11 Appendix .................................................................................................. 11-1

Operations from your PC

Copying (page 5-15) Frequently-Used Sending Saving Documents to FAX Operation

Optimize your office workflow

Optimize your office workflow

1~10 11~20 21~30 1~30

Optimize your office workflow Save energy and cost

Save energy and cost

Strengthen security Use functions more efficiently

Use functions more efficiently

Color and Image Quality Functions

Basic Color Modes

Reference image Reference

Full Color Scans a document in full color. page 6-16

Grayscale Scans a document in grayscale. page 6-16

For details, refer to the following:

Adjusting Image Quality and Color

Adjust the density. Density page 6-11

Adjust the color by strengthening Color Balance page 6-21

Change the image by individually Hue adjustment page 6-20

Adjust the saturation. Saturation page 6-24

Adjust the image quality precisely

Emphasize or blur the image Sharpness page 6-22

Adjust the difference between Contrast page 6-22

Darken or lighten the background Background Density page 6-23

Adjust the scanned image

Decrease the file size and File format page 6-27

Guides Provided with the Machine

Guides (PDF) on the DVD (Product Library)

FAX Operation Guide

Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide

Easily register Embedded Web Server RX User Guide

Print data from a Printing System Driver User Guide

Network Tool for Direct Printing Operation Guide

Monitor the machine NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide

File Management Utility User Guide

PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference

Maintenance Menu User Guide

About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

9 User Authentication and Explains user login and job accounting.

Conventions Used in This Guide

"Regular" Indicates a message or setting.

Conventions used in procedures for operating the machine

Actual procedure Procedure indicated in this guide

Size and Orientation of Paper

Orientation Setting Position Icons on the touch Indicated size in this